Embed Size (px)
Citation preview
G-ClassOperator's Manual
Order no. 6515 4196 13 Part no. 4635844702 Edition A 2016
É4635844702`ËÍ4635844702
G-Clas
sOperat
or'sM
anual
Publication detailsInternet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-cles and about Daimler AG can be found on thefollowing websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated orotherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AGMercedesstraße 13770327 StuttgartGermany
SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of Blue-tooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks ofDOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are reg-istered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofPrince.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered trademarksof Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of HarmanInternational Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are regis-tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius XMRadio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of iBiquityDigital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are regis-tered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-lowing symbols:
G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware of dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.
H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you with infor-mation on environmentally aware actions ordisposal.
! Notes on material damage alert you to dan-gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-cle.
i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.
X This symbol indicates an instructionthat must be followed.
X Several of these symbols in successionindicate an instruction with severalsteps.
(Ypage)
This symbol tells you where you can findmore information about a topic.
YY This symbol indicates a warning or aninstruction that is continued on the nextpage.
Dis‐play This font indicates a display in the mul-tifunction display/COMAND display.
~ This symbol tells you that you can findfurther information in the Digital Oper-ator's Manual.
Parts of the software in the vehicle are protectedby copyright © 2005 The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rights reserved.
As at 09.02.2015
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-cle before driving. For your own safety and alonger vehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this manual. Ignoring themcould result in damage to the vehicle or personalinjury to you or others.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RmodelRorderRcountry specificationRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right tointroduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, alwayspass the documents on to the new owner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AGwishes you safe and pleasantmotor-ing.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company
4635844702 É4635844702`ËÍ
Index ....................................................... 3
Introduction ......................................... 19
At a glance ........................................... 26
Safety ................................................... 34
Opening and closing ........................... 60
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 72
Lights and windshield wipers ............ 84
Climate control .................................... 99
Driving and parking .......................... 111
On-board computer and displays .... 170
Stowage and features ...................... 214
Maintenance and care ...................... 235
Breakdown assistance ..................... 248
Wheels and tires ............................... 262
Technical data ................................... 288
2 Contents
1, 2, 3 ...4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
Function/notes ................................ 5712 V socket ........................................ 223115 V socket ...................................... 223
AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 185Function/notes ................................ 55Important safety notes .................... 55Warning lamp ................................. 206
AccidentAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 46
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 59Adaptive brake lights .......................... 56Additives (engine oil) ........................ 292Adjustable damping .......................... 118Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 43Display message ............................ 189Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 42Important safety notes .................... 40Introduction ..................................... 40PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-tor lamp ........................................... 35Pelvis air bag ................................... 42Side impact air bag .......................... 42Window curtain air bag .................... 43
Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 109Rear ............................................... 110Setting ........................................... 109Setting the center air vents ........... 109Setting the side air vents ............... 109
Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control
Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
All-wheel driveTransfer case ................................. 162
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 182Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-theft alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Approach/departure angle .............. 140Ashtray ............................................... 221Assistance menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 178ASSYST service interval display
Service messages .......................... 240ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 59Function ........................................... 59Switching off the alarm .................... 59
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 191see Lights
Automatic car wash .......................... 241Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 116Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 115Automatic headlamp mode ................ 85Automatic transmission
Automatic drive program ............... 123Display message ............................ 201Drive position (ECO start/stopfunction) ........................................ 121Driving tips .................................... 121Emergency running mode .............. 127Engaging drive position .................. 121Engaging neutral ............................ 120Engaging reverse gear ................... 120Engaging the park position ............ 119Important safety notes .................. 118Kickdown ....................................... 122Manual shifting .............................. 124Neutral (ECO start/stop func-tion) ............................................... 120Overview ........................................ 118Problem (malfunction) ................... 127Program selector button ................ 122Pulling away ................................... 113Selector lever ................................ 119Shift ranges ................................... 123Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 123Trailer towing ................................. 122
Index 3
Transmission position display ........ 119Automatic transmission emer-gency mode ....................................... 127Axle load, permissible (trailer tow-ing) ...................................................... 298
BBabySmart™
Air bag deactivation system ............. 50Backup lamp
Changing bulbs ................................ 96BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 56Battery
Checking (SmartKey) ....................... 62Important safety guidelines(SmartKey) ....................................... 61Replacing (SmartKey) ...................... 62
Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 252Display message ............................ 193Important safety notes .................. 250Jump starting ................................. 254Overview ........................................ 250
Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 178Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 178Display message ............................ 196Notes/function .............................. 155
Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 187Notes ............................................. 293Warning lamp ................................. 205
Brake fluid level ................................ 240Brake lamps
Adaptive ........................................... 56Display message ............................ 190
BrakesABS .................................................. 55BAS .................................................. 56Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 293Display message ............................ 185High-performance brake system .... 135Important safety notes .................. 133Maintenance .................................. 134Parking brake ................................ 131Riding tips ...................................... 133
Warning lamp ................................. 205Breakdown
see Flat tiresee Towing away
Brightness control (instrumentcluster lighting) ................................... 27Brush guard ....................................... 231Bulbs
Backup lamp .................................... 96Brake lamp ...................................... 95Rear fog lamp .................................. 96Tail lamp .......................................... 95see Replacing bulbs
CCalifornia
Important notice for retail cus-tomers and lessees .......................... 20
Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages
CareCar wash ........................................ 241Carpets .......................................... 247Chrome parts ................................. 244Display ........................................... 245Gear or selector lever .................... 246Headlamps ..................................... 244Interior ........................................... 245Matte finish ................................... 243Notes ............................................. 241Paint .............................................. 243Plastic trim .................................... 245Power washer ................................ 242Rear view camera .......................... 244Roof lining ...................................... 247Seat belt ........................................ 246Seat covers .................................... 246Sensors ......................................... 244Steering wheel ............................... 246Tail pipes ....................................... 244Trailer coupling .............................. 245Trim strips ..................................... 246Washing by hand ........................... 242Wheels ........................................... 242Windows ........................................ 243Wiper blades .................................. 244Wooden trim .................................. 246
4 Index
Cargo compartment coverInstalling/removing ....................... 219Notes/how to use ......................... 219Opening and closing ...................... 219Overview ........................................ 219
Cargo compartment enlargementImportant safety notes .................. 216
Cargo tie down rings ......................... 219CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 176Center console
Overview .......................................... 30Upper section .................................. 30
Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 180Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 60
Changing bulbsReversing lamps .............................. 96Side marker lamps ........................... 94Turn signals (front) ........................... 94
Changing gears .................................. 121Checklist
After driving off-road ...................... 139Before driving off-road ................... 138
ChildRestraint system .............................. 47
Child seatBabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem ............................................. 50Forward-facing restraint system ...... 51LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 48On the front-passenger seat ............ 51Problem (malfunction) ..................... 53Rearward-facing restraint system .... 51Top Tether ....................................... 49
Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 53Rear doors ....................................... 54
ChildrenSpecial seat belt retractor ............... 47
Chrome parts (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 244Cigarette lighter ................................ 222Climate control
Controlling automatically ............... 105
Convenience opening/closing(air-recirculation mode) ................. 108Cooling with air dehumidification .. 103Defrosting the windows ................. 106Defrosting the windshield .............. 105Dual-zone automatic climate con-trol ................................................. 100Important safety notes .................... 99Indicator lamp ................................ 104Maximum cooling .......................... 106Notes on using dual-zone auto-matic climate control ..................... 101Overview of systems ........................ 99Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 107Problems with "cooling with airdehumidification" ........................... 104Refrigerant ..................................... 293Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 293Setting the air distribution ............. 105Setting the air vents ...................... 109Setting the airflow ......................... 105Setting the temperature ................ 105Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 107Switching on/off ........................... 102Switching residual heat on/off ...... 108Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 107Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 105Windshield defroster ...................... 106
CockpitOverview .......................................... 26see Instrument cluster
COMANDsee separate operating instructions
Combination switch ............................ 88Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 173Convenience opening feature
see Side windowsConvenience opening/closing (air-recirculation mode) ........................... 108Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 238Display message ............................ 192Filling capacity ............................... 295
Index 5
Notes ............................................. 294Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 182Temperature gauge ........................ 171Warning lamp ................................. 210
Coolingsee Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 25Cruise control
Cruise control lever ....................... 141Display message ............................ 198Driving system ............................... 141Function/notes ............................. 141Resuming the stored speed ........... 142Selecting ........................................ 142Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 142
Cup holderCenter console .............................. 220Important safety notes .................. 220Rear compartment ......................... 220
Customer Assistance Center(CAC) ..................................................... 23Customer Relations Department ....... 23
DData
see Technical dataDaytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 191Switching on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 179Switching on/off (switch) ................ 85
Declarations of conformity ................. 23Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 179Interior lighting .............................. 180
Differential locksDisengaging ................................... 166Engaging ........................................ 165Front axle ...................................... 166General notes ................................ 164Rear axle ........................................ 166Terrain ........................................... 164Transfer case ................................. 165
Digital speedometer ......................... 174
Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 245Display messages
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 184Driving systems ............................. 195Engine ............................................ 192General notes ................................ 184Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 184Lights ............................................. 189Safety systems .............................. 185Service interval display .................. 240SmartKey ....................................... 202Tires ............................................... 198Vehicle ........................................... 201
Distance display (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 178Distance recorder
see Trip odometerDistance warning (warning lamp) .... 212DISTRONIC PLUS
Activating ....................................... 149Activation conditions ..................... 149Cruise control lever ....................... 149Deactivating ................................... 153Display message ............................ 197Displays in the multifunction dis-play ................................................ 151Driving tips .................................... 153Function/notes ............................. 147Important safety notes .................. 147Selecting ........................................ 149Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 152Warning lamp ................................. 212
Door control panelOverview .......................................... 33
DoorsAutomatic locking (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 180Automatic locking (switch) ............... 66Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 60Display message ............................ 201Emergency locking ........................... 66Emergency unlocking ....................... 66Important safety notes .................... 64Opening (from inside) ...................... 64Overview .......................................... 64
Drinking and driving ......................... 132
6 Index
Drive programAutomatic ...................................... 123Display ........................................... 119SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 182
Driving in mountainous terrainApproach/departure angle ............ 140Driving downhill ............................. 140Gradient-climbing capability(maximum) ..................................... 140
Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps
Driving off-roadsee Off-road driving
Driving on flooded roads .................. 135Driving safety systems
4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-tem) ................................................. 57ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 55ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 59Adaptive brake lights ....................... 56BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 56Electronic brake force distribu-tion .................................................. 58ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram) ............................................... 57Important safety information ........... 55Overview .......................................... 55
Driving systemsBlind Spot Assist ............................ 154Cruise control ................................ 141Display message ............................ 195DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 147HOLD function ............................... 157PARKTRONIC ................................. 158Rear view camera .......................... 161SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 145Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 145
Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 121Brakes ........................................... 133DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 153Downhill gradient ........................... 133Driving in winter ............................. 136Driving on flooded roads ................ 135Driving on sand .............................. 139Driving over obstacles ................... 139General .......................................... 132Gravel roads .................................. 139
Hydroplaning ................................. 135Icy road surfaces ........................... 136Off-road driving .............................. 137Off-road fording ............................. 135Snow chains .................................. 264Tire ruts ......................................... 139Towing a trailer .............................. 166Traveling uphill ............................... 140Wet road surface ........................... 134
DVD audioOperating (on-board computer) ..... 176
DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 176
EEASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating ................. 181Function/notes ................................ 79
EASY-EXIT featureFunction/notes ................................ 79Switching on/off ........................... 181
EBD (electronic brake force distri-bution)
Display message ............................ 186Function/notes ................................ 58
ECO start/stop functionDeactivating/activating ................. 114General information ....................... 114
Electrical fusesFuse box in the cargo compart-ment .............................................. 261
Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Electronic Traction Systemsee 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
EmergencyAutomaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 46
Emergency callsee mbrace
Emergency lockingVehicle ............................................. 66
Emergency releaseVehicle ............................................. 66
Emergency Tensioning DevicesActivation ......................................... 43
Index 7
EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 210Display message ............................ 192ECO start/stop function ................ 114Engine number ............................... 289Irregular running ............................ 117Jump-starting ................................. 254Starting problems .......................... 117Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 113Switching off .................................. 131Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 259
Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 117
Engine oilAdding ........................................... 237Additives ........................................ 292Checking the oil level ..................... 236Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 236Display message ............................ 193Filling capacity ............................... 292Notes about oil grades ................... 292Temperature (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 182Viscosity ........................................ 292
Environmental protectionNote ................................................. 19
ESP® (Electronic Stability Pro-gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 182Deactivating/activating ................... 57Display message ............................ 185Function/notes ................................ 57Important safety information ........... 57Trailer stabilization ........................... 58Warning lamp ................................. 207
Exhaust check ................................... 133Exhaust tail pipe (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 244Exterior lighting
see LightsExterior mirrors
Adjusting ......................................... 80Dipping (automatic) ......................... 81Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 181
Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 81Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 80Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 81Setting ............................................. 81Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 82Storing the parking position ............. 81
FFiller cap
see RefuelingFirst-aid kit ......................................... 248Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 250Folding the seat backrest (rear)forwards/back .................................. 217Fuel
Additives ........................................ 291Consumption information .............. 291Consumption statistics .................. 173Displaying the range ...................... 174Fuel gauge ..................................... 171Grade (gasoline) ............................ 290Important safety notes .................. 290Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 291Premium-grade unleaded gaso-line ................................................. 290Problem (malfunction) ................... 130Refueling ........................................ 127Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 290
Fuel consumptionNotes ............................................. 132
Fuel filler flapEmergency release ........................ 129Opening/closing ............................ 128
Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 174
Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 290Problem (malfunction) ................... 130
Fuel/water separatorService ........................................... 241
Fuse allocation chart ........................ 259Fuse box
Battery case ................................... 260Dashboard ..................................... 259
8 Index
Front-passenger footwell ............... 260Transmission tunnel ....................... 260
Fuse extractor ................................... 259Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 259Before changing ............................. 259Dashboard fuse box ....................... 259Fuse allocation chart ..................... 259Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 260Fuse box in the transmission tun-nel ................................................. 260Important safety notes .................. 259In the battery case ......................... 260
GGarage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 234General notes ................................ 231Important safety notes .................. 231Opening/closing the garage door .. 234Programming the remote control ... 231
Gasoline ............................................. 290Gear indicator (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 182Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 246Genuine parts ...................................... 19Genuine wood trim and trim strips(cleaning instructions) ...................... 246Glove box ........................................... 215Gradient-climbing capability (max-imum) ................................................. 140GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defini-tion) .................................................... 279
HHazard warning lamps ........................ 89Head restraints
Adjusting ......................................... 74Adjusting (rear) ................................ 75Installing/removing (rear) ................ 75Luxury .............................................. 75Resetting (front) ............................... 75see NECK-PRO head restraintssee NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
HeadlampsAdding fluid to cleaning system ..... 239Cleaning ......................................... 244Cleaning system (function) .............. 87Cleaning system (notes) ................ 295Fogging up ....................................... 89Protective grille ................................ 95see Automatic headlamp mode
Heatingsee Climate control
High-beam headlampsDisplay message ............................ 190Switching on/off .............................. 88
Hill start assist .................................. 114HOLD function
Function/notes ............................. 157Hood
Closing ........................................... 236Display message ............................ 201Important safety notes .................. 235Opening ......................................... 236
Horn ...................................................... 26Hydroplaning ..................................... 135
IImmobilizer .......................................... 59Instrument cluster
Overview ........................................ 171Warning and indicator lamps ......... 202
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 171Interior lighting
Automatic control ............................ 90Cargo compartment lamp ................ 91Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 180Manual control ................................. 90Overview .......................................... 89Reading lamp ................................... 89Rear interior lighting ........................ 92
JJack
Pump lever ..................................... 283Storage location ............................ 248Using ............................................. 282
Jump starting (engine) ...................... 254
Index 9
KKey positions
SmartKey ....................................... 112
LLap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 182LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 48License plate lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 190Light sensor (display message) ....... 191Lights
Activating/deactivating the inte-rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 180Automatic headlamp mode .............. 85Hazard warning lamps ..................... 89High beam flasher ............................ 88High-beam headlamps ..................... 88Light switch ..................................... 84Low-beam headlamps ...................... 84Parking lamps .................................. 87Rear fog lamp .................................. 86Standing lamps ................................ 87Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board com-puter) ............................................. 179Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) ...................... 85Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 179Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 179Turn signals ..................................... 88see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs
LIM indicator lampCruise control ................................ 142DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 149Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 145
Limit speedVariable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 145
Load anchorage ................................. 218Loading guidelines ............................ 214Locking
Emergency locking ........................... 66
From inside the vehicle (centrallocking button) ................................. 65see Central locking
Locking (doors)Automatic ........................................ 66
Locking centrallysee Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 180LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 162Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 189Switching on/off .............................. 84
Luggage compartment enlarge-ment
Overview ........................................ 216Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 76
Luxury head restraints ....................... 75
MM+S tires ............................................ 264Malfunction message
see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 243mbrace
Call priority .................................... 228Display message ............................ 187Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 228Downloading routes ....................... 230Emergency call .............................. 225Geo fencing ................................... 230Important safety notes .................. 224Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 229MB info call button ........................ 227Remote vehicle locking .................. 229Roadside Assistance button .......... 226Self-test ......................................... 225Speed alert .................................... 230System .......................................... 225Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 231Vehicle remote malfunction diag-nosis .............................................. 229Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 228
10 Index
Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 61General notes .................................. 61Removing ......................................... 61
Memory card (audio) ......................... 176Memory function ................................. 82Message memory (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 184Messages
see Display messagesMirrors
Sun visor ........................................ 221see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirror
Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 177
Mounting wheelsMounting a new wheel ................... 284Raising the vehicle ......................... 282Removing a wheel .......................... 283Securing the vehicle against roll-ing away ........................................ 282
MP3Operation ....................................... 176see separate operating instructions
Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 173Permanent display ......................... 179
Multifunction steering wheelBack button ................................... 172Operating the on-board computer .. 172Overview .......................................... 29
NNavigation
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 174see separate operating instructions
NECK-PRO head restraintsOperation ......................................... 45Resetting triggered .......................... 45
NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsImportant safety notes .................... 45Operation ......................................... 45Resetting when triggered ................. 46
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-cle ....................................................... 111
OOccupant safety
Automaticmeasures after an acci-dent ................................................. 46BabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem ............................................. 50Children in the vehicle ..................... 46Important safety notes .................... 35Introduction to the restraint sys-tem ............................................ 34, 47PASSENGER AIR BAG indicatorlamps ............................................... 35Pets in the vehicle ........................... 55Restraint system warning lamp ........ 35
Off-roadDifferential locks ............................ 164Off-road ABS .................................... 56
Off-road drivingChecklist ........................................ 138Driving on sand .............................. 139Important safety notes .................. 137Traveling uphill ............................... 140
Off-road fording ................................. 135Off-road system
Permanent all-wheel drive ............. 157Oil
see Engine oilOn-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 182Assistance menu ........................... 178Audio menu ................................... 176Convenience submenu .................. 181Display messages .......................... 184DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 151Factory settings submenu ............. 181Important safety notes .................. 170Instrument cluster submenu .......... 179Lighting submenu .......................... 179Menu overview .............................. 173Message memory .......................... 184Navigation menu ............................ 174Operation ....................................... 172RACETIMER ................................... 182Service menu ................................. 178Settings menu ............................... 178Standard display ............................ 173Telephone menu ............................ 177
Index 11
Trip menu ...................................... 173Vehicle submenu ........................... 180Video DVD operation ..................... 176
Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 23Important safety notes .................... 22
Operating systemsee On-board computer
Outside temperature display ........... 171Overhead control panel ...................... 32Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 54
PPaint code number ............................ 288Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 243Panic alarm .......................................... 34Parcel net ........................................... 216Parking
Engaging park position .................. 119Important safety notes .................. 130Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ................................. 81see PARKTRONIC
Parking aidsee Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC
Parking brakeApplying ......................................... 131Display message ............................ 186Warning lamp ................................. 209
Parking lampsSwitching on/off .............................. 87
PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 160Driving system ............................... 158Function/notes ............................. 158Important safety notes .................. 158Problem (malfunction) ................... 161Range of the sensors ..................... 158Trailer towing ................................. 160Warning display ............................. 159
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFIndicator lamp .................................. 35Problems (malfunctions) .................. 53
Pedals ................................................. 133
Permanent all-wheel driveOff-road system ............................. 157
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 55Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 245Power supply (trailer) ....................... 168Power washers .................................. 242Program selector button .................. 122Programming
SmartKey ......................................... 61Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 113
QQR code
Rescue card ..................................... 24Qualified specialist workshop ........... 23
RRACETIMER
Deleting all laps ............................. 183Displaying and starting .................. 182Displaying the intermediate time ... 182Resetting the current lap ............... 183Starting a new lap .......................... 183Stopping ........................................ 183
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 182Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 176see separate operating instructions
Radio-wave reception/transmis-sion in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 23Reading lamp ....................................... 89Rear bench seat
Folding forward .............................. 218Rear compartment
Setting the air vents ...................... 110Rear door
Closing ............................................. 68Display message ............................ 201Important safety notes .................... 67Opening ........................................... 67Opening/closing .............................. 67
Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 190
12 Index
Switching on/off .............................. 86Rear lamps
see LightsRear seat bench
Folding into an upright position ..... 218Rear view camera
Function/notes ............................. 161Rear view camera (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 244Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 107Switching on/off ........................... 107
Rear window wiperSwitching on/off .............................. 97
Rear-view mirrorDipping (automatic) ......................... 81
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem)
Important safety notes .................. 293Refueling
Fuel gauge ..................................... 171Important safety notes .................. 127Refueling process .......................... 128see Fuel
Remote controlProgramming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 231
Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................... 92Overview of bulb types .................... 93
Reporting safety defects .................... 23Rescue card ......................................... 24Reserve (fuel tank)
see FuelReserve fuel
Display message ............................ 194Warning lamp ................................. 210see Fuel
Residual heatSwitching on/off ........................... 108
Restraint systemDisplay message ............................ 187Introduction ..................................... 34Warning lamp ................................. 209Warning lamp (function) ................... 35
Reversing lamps (display mes-sage) ................................................... 191
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 21Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 247Route (navigation)
see Route guidance (navigation)Route guidance (navigation) ............ 174
SSafety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 46Safety system
see Driving safety systemsSeat backrest
Folding back .................................. 217Seat belts
Adjusting the height ......................... 38center rear-compartment seat ......... 38Cleaning ......................................... 246Correct usage .................................. 37Fastening ......................................... 38Important safety guidelines ............. 36Introduction ..................................... 36Releasing ......................................... 39Warning lamp ................................. 204Warning lamp (function) ................... 40
Seat heatingIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 77
Seat ventilationIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 77
SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 74Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-port .................................................. 76Adjusting the head restraint ............ 74Cleaning the cover ......................... 246Correct driver's seat position ........... 72Important safety notes .................... 72Overview .......................................... 72Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 82Switching seat heating on/off ......... 76Switching seat ventilation on/off .... 77
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 244Service interval display
Displaying a service message (on-board computer) ............................ 240
Index 13
Service menu (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 178Service products
Brake fluid ..................................... 293Coolant (engine) ............................ 294Engine oil ....................................... 292Fuel ................................................ 289Important safety notes .................. 289Notes ............................................. 289Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-tem) ............................................... 293Washer fluid ................................... 295
Setting a speed limitsee SPEEDTRONIC
Setting the air distribution ............... 105Settings
Calling up a stored setting ............... 83Factory (on-board computer) ......... 181On-board computer ....................... 178
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 182Shift ranges ....................................... 123Side impact air bag ............................. 42Side marker lamp (display mes-sage) ................................................... 191Side marker lamps (changingbulbs) .................................................... 94Side windows
Convenience closing feature ............ 69Convenience opening feature .......... 68Important safety information ........... 68Opening/closing .............................. 68Overview .......................................... 68Troubleshooting ............................... 69
Ski rack .............................................. 220Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes .................... 69Opening/closing .............................. 70Operating manually .......................... 70Problem (malfunction) ..................... 71
SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 62Changing the programming ............. 61Checking the battery ....................... 62Convenience closing feature ............ 69Convenience opening feature .......... 68Display message ............................ 202Door central locking/unlocking ....... 60
Important safety notes .................... 60Loss ................................................. 63Malfunction ...................................... 63Mechanical key ................................ 61Overview .......................................... 60Problem (malfunction) ..................... 63Starting the engine ........................ 113
Snow chains ...................................... 264Sockets
Front-passenger footwell ............... 223Luggage compartment ................... 223Rear compartment ......................... 223
SOSsee mbrace
Spare fuses ........................................ 259Spare wheel
Mounting ....................................... 281Notes/data .................................... 286Spare wheel bracket at the rear .... 249Stainless-steel spare hub cap ........ 249
Special seat belt retractor .................. 47Specialist workshop ............................ 23Speed, controlling
see Cruise controlSpeedometer
Digital ............................................ 174In the Instrument cluster ............... 171Segments ...................................... 171Selecting the unit of measure-ment .............................................. 179see Instrument cluster
SPEEDTRONICDisplay message ............................ 197Selecting ........................................ 145Variable ......................................... 145
Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 191Switching on/off .............................. 87
Starting the engineImportant safety notes .................. 113
Steering (display message) .............. 202Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 78Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 172Cleaning ......................................... 246Important safety notes .................... 78Paddle shifters ............................... 123
14 Index
Steering wheel heating .................... 78Storing settings (memory func-tion) ................................................. 82
Steering wheel heatingIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 79
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 123Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 182Stowage areas ................................... 215Stowage compartment
Door stowage compartment .......... 216Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) ............................. 216Cup holders ................................... 220Glove box ....................................... 215Important safety information ......... 215Stowage pockets ........................... 216
Summer tires ..................................... 264Sun visor ............................................ 221Surround lighting (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 179SUV
(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 22Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 107Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 59
TTachometer ........................................ 171Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 191see Lights
Tank contentFuel gauge ..................................... 171
Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 289Tires ............................................... 284Tires/wheels ................................. 284Trailer loads ................................... 298Vehicle data ................................... 295Wheels ........................................... 284
TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 228Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 228Downloading routes ....................... 230Emergency call .............................. 225Geo fencing ................................... 230
Important safety notes .................. 224Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 229MB info call button ........................ 227Remote vehicle locking .................. 229Roadside Assistance button .......... 226Self-test ......................................... 225Speed alert .................................... 230System .......................................... 225Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 231Vehicle remote malfunction diag-nosis .............................................. 229Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 228
TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 177Display message ............................ 202Menu (on-board computer) ............ 177Number from the phone book ........ 177Redialing ........................................ 178Rejecting/ending a call ................. 177
Telephone compartment .................. 216Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 171Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 182Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 182Outside temperature ...................... 171Setting (climate control) ................ 105
Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 59Immobilizer ...................................... 59
Tilt/sliding sunroofsee Sliding sunroof
Timesee separate operating instructions
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 182Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 268Checking manually ........................ 268Display message ............................ 198Maximum ....................................... 268Notes ............................................. 266Recommended ............................... 265Table (single tires) ......................... 266
Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressure elec-tronically ........................................ 270Function/notes ............................. 268Restarting ...................................... 270Warning lamp ................................. 213
Index 15
Warning message .......................... 270Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 280Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 279Bar (definition) ............................... 279Changing a wheel .......................... 281Characteristics .............................. 279Checking ........................................ 262Curb weight (definition) ................. 280Definition of terms ......................... 279Direction of rotation ...................... 282Display message ............................ 198Distribution of the vehicle occu-pants (definition) ............................ 281DOT (Department of Transporta-tion) (definition) ............................. 279DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 278GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 279GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) (defi-nition) ............................................ 279GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-inition) ........................................... 279GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-ing) (definition) .............................. 280Important safety notes .................. 262Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 279Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 280Labeling (overview) ........................ 275Load bearing index (definition) ...... 281Load index ..................................... 277Load index (definition) ................... 280Maximum load on a tire (defini-tion) ............................................... 280Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 280Maximum permissible tire pres-sure (definition) ............................. 280Maximum tire load ......................... 278Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 280Optional equipment weight (defi-nition) ............................................ 281PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-inition) ........................................... 280Replacing ....................................... 281
Service life ..................................... 263Sidewall (definition) ....................... 280Speed rating (definition) ................ 279Storing ........................................... 282Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 279Technical data ............................... 284Temperature .................................. 275TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 281Tire bead (definition) ...................... 280Tire pressure (definition) ................ 280Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 279Tire size (data) ............................... 284Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 276Tire tread ....................................... 263Tire tread (definition) ..................... 280Total load limit (definition) ............. 281Traction ......................................... 275Traction (definition) ....................... 281Tread wear ..................................... 274TWR (permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight) (definition) ................. 281Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 274Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 279Wear indicator (definition) ............. 281Wheel rim (definition) .................... 279see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 49Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 259Important safety notes .................. 256
Towing a trailerAxle load, permissible .................... 298Driving tips .................................... 166Lights display message .................. 189Mounting dimensions .................... 297Shift range ..................................... 122Trailer loads ................................... 298Trailer tow hitch ............................. 297
Towing awayImportant safety guidelines ........... 256In the event of malfunctions .......... 258With both axles on the ground ....... 257
16 Index
Towing eyeFront .............................................. 257Rear ............................................... 257
Trailer7-pin connector ............................. 169Power supply ................................. 168
Trailer coupling (cleaning instruc-tions) .................................................. 245Trailer loads
Technical data ............................... 298Trailer tow hitch
Ball position ................................... 298Trailer towing
ESP® ................................................ 58PARKTRONIC ................................. 160
Transfer caseGeneral notes ................................ 162Shift range ..................................... 162Shifting .......................................... 162Shifting (general notes) .................. 162Shifting (important safety notes) ... 162Shifting to neutral .......................... 163Switching off the off-road gearratio ............................................... 163Switching on the off-road gearratio ............................................... 163
Transmissionsee Automatic transmission
Transmission positions .................... 121Transporting the vehicle .................. 258Traveling uphill
Brow of hill ..................................... 140Trip computer (on-board com-puter) .................................................. 173Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 173Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 174
Turn signalsChanging bulbs (front) ..................... 94Display message ............................ 190Switching on/off .............................. 88
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) (defi-nition) ................................................. 281Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
UUnlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 66From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 65
VVanity mirror
Sun visor ........................................ 221Variable SPEEDTRONIC
Function/notes ............................. 145Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 23Data acquisition ............................... 24Display message ............................ 201Emergency locking ........................... 66Emergency unlocking ....................... 66Equipment ....................................... 20Individual settings .......................... 178Limited Warranty ............................. 24Loading .......................................... 271Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 60Lowering ........................................ 284Maintenance .................................... 21Parking for a long period ................ 132Pulling away ................................... 113Raising ........................................... 282Reporting problems ......................... 23Securing from rolling away ............ 282Tow-starting ................................... 256Towing away .................................. 256Transporting .................................. 258Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 60Vehicle data ................................... 295
Vehicle data ....................................... 295Vehicle data (off-road driving)
Approach/departure angle ............ 296Fording depth ................................ 296Maximum gradient climbing abil-ity .................................................. 297
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 295Vehicle identification number
see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 288Vehicle tool kit .................................. 248
Index 17
VentilationSetting the airflow ......................... 105
VideoOperating the DVD ......................... 176
VIN ...................................................... 288
WWarning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 206Brakes ........................................... 205Check Engine ................................. 210Coolant .......................................... 210Cruise control ................................ 142Distance warning ........................... 212DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 212ESP® .............................................. 207ESP® OFF ....................................... 208Fuel tank ........................................ 210LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 149LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 145Overview .................................. 28, 202Parking brake ................................ 209PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 35Reserve fuel ................................... 210Restraint system ............................ 209Seat belt ........................................ 204Tire pressure monitor .................... 213
Warning triangle ................................ 248Warranty .............................................. 20Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 202Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 284Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 281Checking ........................................ 262Cleaning ......................................... 242Important safety notes .................. 262Interchanging/changing ................ 281Mounting a new wheel ................... 284Mounting a wheel .......................... 282Overview ........................................ 262Removing a wheel .......................... 283Storing ........................................... 282Technical data ............................... 284Tightening torque ........................... 284Wheel size/tire size ....................... 284
Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 188Operation ......................................... 43
Windowssee Side windows
Windows (cleaning instructions) ..... 243Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 105Windshield heating ........................... 106Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer systemWindshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 239Notes ............................................. 295
Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ..................... 98Rear window wiper .......................... 97Replacing the wiper blades .............. 97Switching on/off .............................. 96
WinterDriving in winter ............................. 136Winter operation ............................ 264
Winter drivingSnow chains .................................. 264
Winter operationOverview ........................................ 264
Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 264
Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 244Important safety notes .................... 97Replacing ......................................... 97
18 Index
Protection of the environment
General notes
H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of compre-hensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in an environmen-tally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel con-sumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.
Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-tion.
Environmental concerns and recom-mendationsWherever the operating instructions require youto dispose of materials, first try to regenerate orre-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-tal rules and regulations when disposing ofmaterials. In this way you will help to protect theenvironment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.
! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-ces, as well as control units and sensors forthese restraint systems, may be installed inthe following areas of your vehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audio sys-tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairsor welding. You could impair the operatingefficiency of the restraint systems.Have aftermarket accessories installed at aqualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels aswell as accessories relevant to safety whichhave not been approved by Mercedes. Thiscould lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
Introduction 19
Z
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories thathave been specifically approved for your vehi-cle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has been spe-cifically developed, manufactured or selectedfor and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts shouldtherefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintaina supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. In addition,strategically located parts delivery centers pro-vide quick and reliable parts service.Always specify the vehicle identification number(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benzparts (Y page 288).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment of yourvehicle available at the time of going to print.Country-specific differences are possible. Bearin mind that your vehicle may not feature allfunctions described here. This also applies tosafety-relevant systems and functions. Theequipment in your vehicle may therefore differfrom that shown in the descriptions and illus-trations.The original purchase agreement lists all sys-tems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and the MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and should bekept in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
WarrantyYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service and WarrantyInformation booklet.Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed parts inaccordance with the following warranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Islandand Vermont Emission Control System War-rantyRState warranty enforcement laws (LemonLaws)
Replacement parts and accessories are coveredby the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessorieswarranties. These are available at any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If you lose the Service and Warranty Infor-mation booklet, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to arrange a replace-ment. It will be mailed to you.
Information for customers in Califor-niaIn California, you have the right to exchange avehicle or receive a refund of the purchase orleasing price ifMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/oran authorized workshop or maintenance facilitycannot, after several authorized repairs, rectifyconsiderable damage to or malfunctions of thevehicle that are covered by the contractual war-ranty. During the period of 18months from orig-inal delivery of the vehicle or the accumulationof 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) onthe odometer of the vehicle, whichever occursfirst, a reasonable number of repair attempts ispresumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one ormore of the following occurs:(1) the serious defect or damage can result in
deadly or serious injury to the vehicle occu-pants while driving AND this defect hasalready been repaired at least twice AND
20 Introduction
Mercedes-Benz, LLC has been informed inwriting of the necessity of a repair.
(2) the defect or damage, though less seriousthan (1) above, has already been repaired atleast four times AND Mercedes-Benz hasbeen informed in writing of the necessity ofa repair.
(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longer than30 calendar days because of repair workresulting from this or other serious defectsor damage.
Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350
MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describes allthe necessary maintenance work which shouldbe done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and Warranty Bookletwith you when you bring the vehicle to anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The serviceadvisor will record every service for you in theService and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-gram offers technical help in the event of abreakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Programbrochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"section in the Service and Warranty booklet(Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-erature portfolio.
Change of address or change of own-ershipIn the event of a change of address, please sendus the "Notification of Address Change" in the
Service andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-ing you in a timelymanner should the need arise.If you sell yourMercedes, please leave the entireliterature in the vehicle so that it is available tothe next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please send usthe "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in theService andGuarantee booklet or simply call theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center(USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconverter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalytic converter.Rthe fuelmay have a considerably lower octanerating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine dam-age.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available fordelivery in Europe through our European Deliv-ery Program. For details, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or write to one of thefollowing addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Introduction 21
Z
Sports Utility Vehicle
G WARNINGDue to the high center of gravity, the vehiclemay start to skid and roll over in the event ofan abrupt steering maneuver and/or whenthe vehicle's speed is not adapted to the roadconditions. There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your speed and driving style tothe vehicle's driving characteristics and to theprevailing road and weather conditions.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-over rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely may resultin an accident, rollover of the vehicle, and severeor fatal injury.In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signif-icantly more likely to die than a person wearinga seat belt.You and all vehicle occupants should alwayswear your seat belts.
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/mainte-nance work as well as any required repairscarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system. There is a riskof fire.When driving off road or on unpaved roads,check the vehicle's underside regularly. Inparticular, remove parts of plants or otherflammable materials which have becometrapped. In the case of damage, contact aqualified specialist workshop.
G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of other net-worked components. In particular, systemsrelevant to safety could also be affected. As aresult, these may no longer function as inten-ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety ofthe vehicle. There is an increased risk of anaccident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-tronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical and elec-tronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-tronics, the general operating permit is ren-dered invalid.
! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. acurb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriage orparts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the undercar-riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could bedamaged without the damage being visible.Components damaged in this way can unex-pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, nolonger withstand the strain they are designedto.If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-bustible materials such as leaves, grass ortwigs can gather between the underbody andthe underbody paneling. If these materialscome in contact with hot parts of the exhaustsystem, they can catch fire.In such situations, have the vehicle checkedand repaired immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and traffic condi-tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
22 Introduction
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation issubject to the following two conditions: 1) Thesedevices may not cause harmful interference,and 2) These devices must accept any interfer-ence received, including interference that maycause undesired operation. Changes or modifi-cations not expressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) These devices maynot cause interference, and (2) These devicesmust accept any interference, including inter-ference that may cause undesired operation ofthe device."
Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-fied specialist workshop. It has the necessaryspecialist knowledge, tools and qualifications tocorrectly carry out the work required on yourvehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-evant to safety.Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.Always have the following work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and modifica-tionsRwork on electronic components
Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when drivingyour vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe technical data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotorvehicles
Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you to contactan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-isfaction, please discuss the problem again witha Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one ofthe following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is reproduced as required ofall manufacturers according to Title 49, Code ofU.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant tothe National Traffic and Motor Vehicle SafetyAct of 1966.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could cause injuryor death, you should immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may ordera recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problems
Introduction 23
Z
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-BenzUSA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-istrator, NHTSA Headquarters,1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,Washington, DC 20590.You can obtain additional information aboutvehicle safety from:http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual aboutthe proper operation of your vehicle as well asabout possible vehicle damage. Damage toyour vehicle that arises from culpable contra-ventions against these instructions is not cov-ered either by the Mercedes-Benz LimitedWarranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-ranty.
QR codes for rescue cards
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flapand on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In theevent of an accident, rescue services can usethe QR codes to quickly find the appropriaterescue cards for your vehicle. The current res-cue card contains the most important informa-tion about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g.the routing of the electric cables.You can find more information under http://portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/content/asportal/en/communication/informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data recordingA wide range of electronic components in yourvehicle contain data memories.These data memories temporarily or perma-nently store technical information about:RVehicle's operating stateRIncidentsRMalfunctions
In general, this technical information docu-ments the state of a component, a module, asystem or the surroundings.These include, for example:Roperating conditions of system components,e.g. fluid levelsRthe vehicle's statusmessages and those of itsindividual components, e.g. number of wheelrevolutions/speed, deceleration in move-ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedalpositionRmalfunctions and defects in important systemcomponents, e.g. lights, brakesRvehicle reactions and operating conditions inspecial driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-ment, intervention of stability control sys-temsRambient conditions, e.g. outside temperatureThis data is of an exclusively technical natureand can be used to:Rassist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-tions and defectsRanalyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-dentRoptimize vehicle functionThe data cannot be used to trace the vehicle'smovements.When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-mation can be read from the event datamemoryand malfunction data memory.Services include, for example:Rrepair servicesRservice processesRwarrantiesRquality assuranceIt is read by employees of the service network(including manufacturers) using special diag-nostic devices. More detailed information isobtained from it, if required.After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-mation is deleted from the malfunction memoryor is continually overwritten.When operating the vehicle, situations are con-ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-tion with other information (if necessary, underconsultation with an authorized expert), couldbe traced to a person.
24 Introduction
Examples include:Raccident reportsRdamage to the vehicleRwitness statementsFurther additional functions that have been con-tractually agreed upon with the customer allowcertain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-cle as well. The additional functions include, forexample, vehicle location in case of an emer-gency.
COMAND/mbrace (Canada: TELEAID)If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND ormbrace, additional data about the vehicle’soperation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-uations, and the location of the vehicle may becompiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-tem.For additional information please refer to theCOMAND User Manual and/or the mbraceTerms and Conditions.
Event data recordersThis vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR isto record data that will assist in understandinghow a vehicle’s systems performed in certaincrash or near crash-like situations, such as dur-ing air bag deployment or when hitting a roadobstacle. The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics and safety systemsfor a short period of time, typically 30 secondsor less.The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle are oper-atingRwhether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a better understand-ing of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data is recorded byyour vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data is recorded by the EDR undernormal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, can combine the EDR data withthe type of personal identification data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-ment is required, and access to the vehicle orthe EDR is needed. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties that have the spe-cial equipment, such as law enforcement, canread the information by accessing the vehicle orthe EDR.EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-dent claims, and vehicle safety. Since the CrashData Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extractdata from the EDR is commercially available,Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expresslydisclaims any and all liability arising from theextraction of this information by unauthorizedMercedes-Benz personnel.MBUSA will not share EDR data with otherswithout the consent of the vehicle owners or, ifthe vehicle is leased, without the consent of thelessee. Exceptions to this representationinclude responses to subpoenas by law enforce-ment; by federal, state or local government; inconnectionwith or arising out of litigation involv-ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,as required by law.Warning: The EDR is a component of the Sup-plemental Restraint System ("SRS") Module.Tampering with, altering, modifying or removingthe EDR component may result in a malfunctionof the SRS Module and other systems.State laws or regulations regarding EDRs thatconflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, thefederal regulation governs. As of February 2013,13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General informationInformation on license for free and open-sourcesoftware used in your vehicle and its electroniccomponents is available on the following web-site:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Introduction 25
Z
Cockpit
Function Page
: Combination switch 88
; Steering wheel paddle shifters 123
= Instrument cluster 171
? Horn
A Overhead control panel 32
B PARKTRONIC warning display 158
C Climate control systems 99
D Ignition lock 112
E Adjusts the steering wheel 78
F Cruise control lever 141
G Light switch 84
H Opens the hood 236
26 CockpitAt
aglance
Instrument cluster
Displays and controls
Function Page
: Speedometer with segments 171
; Multifunction display 173
= Tachometer 171
? Coolant temperature display 171
A Fuel gauge
B Instrument cluster lighting control 171
Instrument cluster 27
Ataglance
Warning and indicator lamps
Function Page
: L Low-beam headlamps 84
; T Parking lamps, licenseplate and instrument clusterlighting 84
= ÷ ESP® 207
? K High-beam headlamps 88
A Electric parking brake (yel-low) 131F USA only! Canada only
B ! Electric parking brake(red) 131
C J Brakes (yellow) 205
D · Distance warning 212
E #! Turn signals 88
Function Page
F h Tire pressure monitor 213
G 6 Restraint system 34
H ü Seat belt 204
I ? Coolant 210
J R Rear fog lamp 86
K ; Check Engine 210
L 8 Reserve fuel 210
M å ESP® OFF 207
N ! ABS 206
O Brakes (red)$ (USA only)J (Canada only) 205
28 Instrument clusterAt
aglance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
: Multifunction display ~
; COMAND display ~
= ?
Switches on the Voice Con-trol System; see the separateoperating instructions
? ~ ~
Rejects or ends a callExits phone book/redialmemory6
Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redial mem-oryWX
Adjusts the volume8
Mute
Function Page
A =; ~
Selects a menu9:
Selects a submenu or scrollsthrough listsa
Confirms selections andhides messages
B %
BackSwitches off the Voice Con-trol System; see the separateoperating instructions
Multifunction steering wheel 29
Ataglance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
: COMAND (see separateoperating instructions) ~
; c Seat heating 76
= s Seat ventilation 77
? c PARKTRONIC 158
A è ECO start/stop func-tion 114
Function Page
B £ Hazard warning lamps 89
C 4 5 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp 35
D å ESP® 57
30 Center consoleAt
aglance
Center console, lower section
Function Page
E Stowage compartment/ashtray 221
F Automatic transmission selector lever 119
G Selects park position 119
H + Selects/deselects LOW RANGE off-road gear 162
I Stowage compartment ~
J Opens/closes the stowage compartment 215
K Cigarette lighter 222
L Audio controller (see the separate operating instructions)COMAND controller ~
M Switches the windshield heating on/off 106
N Adjustable damping 118
O Ú Selects the drive program 122Ñ Selects the drive program (AMG vehicles)
P Parking brake 131
Center console 31
Ataglance
Overhead control panel
Function Page
: p Switches the left-handreading lamp on/off 89
; c Switches the front inte-rior lighting on 90
= u Switches the rear inte-rior lighting on/off 90
? | Switches the front inte-rior lighting/automatic inte-rior lighting control off 90
A p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 89
B ¡ Opens/closes the slid-ing sunroof 70
Function Page
C F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbrace system) 226
D G SOS button (mbracesystem) 225
E ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 227
F Rear-view mirror 80
G Buttons for the garage dooropener 234
H Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System
32 Overhead control panelAt
aglance
Door control panel
Function Page
: n Activates/deactivatesthe override feature for theside windows in the rearcompartment 54
; W Opens/closes the sidewindows 68
= 7Zö\Adjusts and folds the exteriormirrors in/out electrically 80
Function Page
? r45= Storessettings for the seat, exteriormirrors and steering wheel(memory function) 82
A Adjusts the seats 74
B %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 65
C Opens the door 64
Door control panel 33
Ataglance
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Panic alarm
X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the indicator lampflashes.
X To deactivate: press! button: again.orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
i USA only:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.The Product label with FCC ID and IC certifi-cation number can be found in the batterycase of the SmartKey.
i Canada only:This device complies with the RSS-210 Rulesof Industry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.The Product label with FCC ID and IC certifi-cation number can be found in the batterycase of the SmartKey.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint systemThe restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-cle occupants coming into contact with parts ofthe vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.The restraint system can also reduce the forcestowhich vehicle occupants are subjected duringan accident.The restraint system comprises:RSeat belt systemRAir bagsRChild restraint systemRChild seat securing systemsThe components of the restraint system work inconjunction with each other. They can onlydeploy their protective function if, at all times, allvehicle occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly(Y page 37)Rhave adjusted their seat and head restraintproperly (Y page 72).
As the driver, you also have to make sure thatthe steering wheel is adjusted correctly.Observe the information relating to the correctdriver's seat position (Y page 72).You also have to make sure that an air bag caninflate properly if deployed (Y page 40).An air bag supplements a correctly worn seatbelt. As an additional safety device, the air bagincreases the level of protection for vehicleoccupants in the event of an accident. For exam-ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protectionoffered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
34 Occupant safetySafety
are not deployed.When an accident occurs, onlythe air bags that increase protection in that par-ticular accident situation are deployed. How-ever, seat belts and air bags generally do notprotect against objects penetrating the vehiclefrom the outside.Information on restraint system operation canbe found under "Triggering of the EmergencyTensioning Devices and air bags" (Y page 43).For more information about children travelingwith you in the vehicle and on child restraintsystems, see "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 46).
Important safety notes
G WARNINGModifications to the restraint system maycause it to no longer work as intended. Therestraint system may then not perform itsintended protective function andmay fail in anaccident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Never modify parts of the restraint system.Never tamper with the wiring, the electroniccomponents or their software.If it is necessary tomodify an air bag system toaccommodate a person with disabilities, con-tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center fordetails. USA only: for further information con-tact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1‑800‑367‑6372).
Restraint system warning lampThe functions of the restraint system arechecked after the ignition is switched on and atregular intervals while the engine is running.Therefore, malfunctions can be detected ingood time.The 6 restraint system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-nents of the restraint system are in operationalreadiness.
Amalfunction has occurred if the 6 restraintsystem warning lamp:Rdoes not light up after the ignition is switchedonRdoes not go out after a few seconds with theengine runningRlights up again while the engine is running
G WARNINGIf restraint system is malfunctioning, restraintsystem components may be triggered unin-tentionally or might not be triggered at all inthe event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-ple. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Have the restraint system checked andrepaired in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: ispart of the BabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem.A permanently lit PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp informs you that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Depending on the person in the front-passengerseat, the front-passenger front air bag musteither be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-lowing points. You must make sure of this bothbefore and during a journey.RChildren in a child restraint system:whether the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated or enabled depends on the instal-
Occupant safety 35
Safety
Z
led child restraint system, and the age andsize of the child. Therefore, always observethe information on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 46). There you will also find instruc-tions on rearward and forward-facing childrestraint systems on the front-passengerseat.RAll other persons: the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp must be off. Be sure toobserve the notes on "Seatbelts“ (Y page 36) and "Air bags"(Y page 40). There you can also find infor-mation on the correct seat position.
Observe the information on the BabySmart™ airbag deactivation system in the front-passengerseat (Y page 50).
Seat belts
IntroductionSeat belts are the most effective means ofrestricting the movement of vehicle occupantsin the event of an accident or the vehicle rollingover. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of the vehicleinterior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicleoccupant in the best position in relation to theair bag.The seat belt system comprises:RSeat beltsREmergency Tensioning Devices for the frontseat belts and the outer seat belts in the rearRBelt force limitersIf the seat belt is pulled out at the belt sash guidequickly or with a jerky movement, the beltretractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-ted any further.The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens theseat belt in an accident, pulling the belt closeagainst the body. However it does not pull thevehicle occupant back in the direction of thebackrest.The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-rect an incorrect seat position or the routing ofan incorrectly fastened seat belt.When triggered, a belt force limiter helps toreduce the force exerted by the seat belt on thevehicle occupant.The belt force limiters for the front seats aresynchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This canreduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-pants during an accident.
! If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle ofthe front-passenger seat. This may otherwiselead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten-sioning Device in the event of an accident,which will then need to be replaced.
Important safety notesThe use of seat belts and child restraint systemsis required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEvenwhere this is not required by law, all vehicleoccupants should correctly fasten their seatbelts before starting the journey.
G WARNINGIf the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-not protect as intended. Furthermore, anincorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-tion. This poses an increased risk of injury oreven fatal injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants areseated properly with a correctly fastened seatbelt.
G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if you have not moved the back-rest to an almost vertical position.When brak-ing or in the event of an accident, you couldslide underneath the seat belt and sustainabdomen or neck injuries, for example. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always ensure that the backrestis in an almost vertical position and that theshoulder section of your seat belt is routedacross the center of your shoulder.
36 Occupant safetySafety
G WARNINGPersons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannotfasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-tional suitable restraint system. If the seatbelt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protectas intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-tened seat belt can cause additional injury, forexample, in an accident, during braking or anabrupt change of direction. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.For this reason, always secure persons under5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraintsystems.
If a child younger than twelve years old andunder 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in thevehicle:Ralways secure the child in a child restraintsystem suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-cle. The child restraint systemmust be appro-priate to the age, weight and size of the childRalways observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Children in the vehicle" sectionof this Operator's Manual (Y page 46) inaddition to the child restraint system manu-facturer's installation instructions
G WARNINGThe seat belts may not perform their intendedprotective function if:Rthey are damaged, modified, extremelydirty, bleach or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltanchorages or inertia reels have beenmodi-fied
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage inan accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-sioning Devices could accidentally trigger orfail to deploy when necessary. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertiareels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-ing an accident, have the seat belts checkedimmediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Proper use of the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 36).All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seatbelt correctly before beginning the journey. Alsomake sure that all vehicle occupants are alwayswearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicleis in motion.When fastening the seat belt, always make surethat:Rthe seat belt tongue is only inserted to the beltbuckle belonging to that seat.Rthe seat belt is tight across your body.Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a wintercoat.Rthe seat belt is not twisted.Only then can the forces which occur be dis-tributed over the area of the belt.Rthe shoulder section of the belt is alwaysrouted across the center of your shoulder.The shoulder section of the belt must notcome into contact with your neck or be routedunder your arm. Where possible, adjust theseat belt to the appropriate height.Rthe lap belt passes tightly and as low down aspossible across your lap.The lap belt must always be routed acrossyour hip joints and not across your abdomen.This applies particularly to pregnant women.If necessary, push the lap belt down to yourhip joint and pull it tight using the shouldersection of the belt.Rthe seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-ted or fragile objects.If you have such items located on or in yourclothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, storethese in a suitable place.Ronly one person is using a seat belt at a time.Infants and children must never travel sittingon the lap of a vehicle occupant. In the event
Occupant safety 37
Safety
Z
of an accident, they could be crushedbetween the vehicle occupant and seat belt.Robjects are never secured with a seat belt ifthe seat belt is also being used by one of thevehicle's occupants.
Seat belts are only intended to secure andrestrain vehicle occupants. Always observe the"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-gage or loads (Y page 214).
Fastening and adjusting the seat beltsObserve the safety notes on the seat belt(Y page 36) and the notes on correct use of seatbelts (Y page 37).If the center rear seat belt is being used, alsoobserve the information about the seat belt forthe center rear seat (Y page 38).
Basic illustrationX Adjust the seat (Y page 72).The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-tical position.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of belt sashguide= and engage belt tongue; into beltbuckle:.
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.
The shoulder section of the seat belt mustalways be routed across the center of the shoul-der. Adjust the belt sash guide if necessary.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.The belt sash guide engages in various posi-tions.
X To lower: pull release button? and slide thebelt sash guide downwards.
X Let go of release button? in the desiredposition and make sure that the belt sashguide engages.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. Further information can be found under"Special seat belt retractor" (Y page 47).
Seat belt for the center rear seat
G WARNINGWhen the three-point seat belt for the centerrear seat is not in use, it may be thrownaround while driving, e.g. when braking or inan accident. There is a risk of injury.When the three-point seat belt for the centerrear seat is not in use, always secure both beltbuckle tongues in the retainer.
38 Occupant safetySafety
: Bracket for seat belt tongues; Belt buckle for fixed belt tongue= Release button for fixed belt tongue? Fixed belt tongueA Belt buckle for movable belt tongueB Release button for movable belt tongueC Movable belt tongue
X Pull both seat belt tongues? andC frombracket:.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outletand engage fixed belt tongue? in beltbuckle;.
X To fasten the seat belt: pull the seat beltsmoothly from the belt outlet and engagemovable belt tongueC in belt buckleA.
X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.
Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will betrapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.This could damage the door, the door trimpanel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
Occupant safety 39
Safety
Z
can no longer fulfill their protective functionand must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Basic illustrationX Press release button:, hold belt tongue;firmly and guide it back towards belt sashguide=.
Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-pants must wear their seat belts. It may light upcontinuously or flash. In addition, there may bea warning tone.Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt hasalready been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time theengine is started. If, after six seconds, the driveror front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastenedor a front door is opened again, the 7 seatbelt warning lamp goes out.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after theengine is started, an additional warning tone willsound. Thiswarning tone stops after six secondsor when the driver's seat belt is fastened.If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-passenger seat belts are not fastened, awarningtone sounds. A warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the
driver or front passenger have fastened theirseat belts.If the driver or front passenger unfasten theirseat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-ing is activated again.
i For more information on the 7 seat beltwarning lamp, see "Warning and indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster, seat belts"(Y page 204).
Air bags
IntroductionThe installation point of an air bag can be rec-ognized by the AIR BAG symbol.An air bag complements the correctly fastenedseat belt. It is no substitute for the seat belt. Theair bag provides additional protection in appli-cable accident situations.Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. Thedifferent air bag systems function independ-ently from one another (Y page 43).However, no system available today can com-pletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injurycaused by an air bag due to the high speed atwhich the air bag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you do not sit in the correct seat position,the air bag cannot protect as intended andcould even cause additional injury whendeployed. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.To avoid hazardous situations, always makesure that all of the vehicle's occupants:Rhave fastened their seat belts correctly,including pregnant womenRare sitting correctly andmaintain the great-est possible distance to the air bagsRfollow the following instructionsAlways make sure that there are no objectsbetween the air bag and the vehicle's occu-pants.
40 Occupant safetySafety
RAdjust the seats properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in an almost upright position. The center ofthe head restraint must support the head atabout eye level.RMove the driver's and front-passenger seatsas far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-tionmust allow the vehicle to be driven safely.ROnly hold the steering wheel on the outside.This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.RAlways lean against the backrest while driv-ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against thedoor or side window. Youmay otherwise be inthe deployment area of the air bags.RAlways keep your feet in the footwell in frontof the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-board, for example. Your feet may otherwisebe in the deployment area of the air bag.RFor this reason, always secure persons lessthan 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannotbe worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, alsoobserve the following notes:RAlways secure children under twelve years ofage and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitablechild restraint systems.RChild restraint systems should be installed onthe rear seats.ROnly secure a child in a rearward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatwhen the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is permanently lit, the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 35).RAlways observe the instructions and safetynotes on "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 46) and on the "Child restraint sys-tem on the front-passenger seat"(Y page 51) in addition to the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may preventan air bag from functioning correctly. Beforestarting your journey and to avoid risks resultingfrom the speed of the air bag as it deploys, makesure that:Rthere are no people, animals or objectsbetween the vehicle occupants and an airbag.Rthere are no objects between the seat, doorand B-pillar.Rno hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang onthe grab handles or coat hooks.Rno accessories, such as cup holders, areattached to the vehicle within the deploymentarea of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,rear side trim or side walls.Rno heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are inthe pockets of your clothing. Store suchobjects in a suitable place.
G WARNINGIf you modify the air bag cover or affix objectssuch as stickers to it, the air bag can no longerfunction correctly. There is an increased riskof injury.Never modify an air bag cover or affix objectsto it.
G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work not per-formed correctly to the doors or door panel-ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to thefunction of the sensors being impaired. The airbags might therefore not function properlyanymore. Consequently, the air bags cannotprotect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or door pan-eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Occupant safety 41
Safety
Z
Front air bags
Driver's air bag: deploys in front of the steer-ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag;deploys in front of and above the glove box.When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-tional head and thorax protection for the occu-pants in the front seats.A permanently lit PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp informs you that the front-passenger front air bag is deactivated(Y page 35).The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Ran occupant is detected on the front-passenger seatRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampis not lit (Y page 50)Rthe restraint system control unit predicts ahigh accident severity
Side impact air bags
G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tions of BabySmart™ may be impaired. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.
Side impact air bags: deploy next to the outerbolster of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bag offersadditional thorax protection. However, it doesnot protect the:RheadRneckRarmsIn the event of a side impact, the side impact airbag is deployed on the side on which the impactoccurs.
Pelvis air bags
G WARNINGUnsuitable seat covers could restrict or evenprevent the deployment of the air bags inte-grated into the seats. Consequently, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, the func-tions of BabySmart™ may be impaired. Thisposes an increased risk of injury or even fatalinjury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.
42 Occupant safetySafety
Pelvis air bags: deploy below next to the outerseat cushions.When activated, the pelvis air bag enhances thelevel of protection of the vehicle occupants onthe side of the vehicle on which the impactoccurs.The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side of theimpact.
Window curtain air bags
Window curtain air bags: are integrated intothe side of the roof frame and deployed in thearea from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.When deployed, the window curtain air bagenhances the level of protection for the head.However, it does not protect the chest or arms.In the event of a side impact, the window curtainair bag is deployed on the side on which theimpact occurs.If the system determines that they can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt, a window curtain air bag may bedeployed in other accident situations(Y page 43).
Deployment of Emergency TensioningDevices and air bags
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after an air bag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have adeployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G WARNINGA deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-tection and cannot provide the intended pro-tection in an accident. There is an increasedrisk of injury.Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-ist workshop in order to have a deployed airbag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the air bagscontinue to perform their protective function forthe vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.
G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longer opera-tional and are unable to perform their inten-ded protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-sioning Devices which have been triggeredimmediately replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggeredor air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. The 6 restraint system warninglamp lights up.Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-ing. The powder that is released generally doesnot constitute a health hazard, but it may causeshort-term breathing difficulties in people withasthma or other respiratory problems. To avoidthis, you may wish to get out of the vehicle oropen the windows as soon as it is safe to do so.Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency TensioningDevices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,which may require special handling and regardfor the environment. National guidelines mustbe observed during disposal. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Occupant safety 43
Safety
Z
Method of operationDuring the first stage of a collision, the restraintsystem control unit evaluates important physi-cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-eration, such as:RdurationRdirectionRintensityBased on the evaluation of this data, therestraint system control unit triggers the Emer-gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal orrear collision.An Emergency Tensioning Device can only betriggered, if:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe components of the restraint system areoperational; see "Restraint system warninglamp" (Y page 35)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe respective front-passenger seat
The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rearcompartment are triggered independently of thelock status of the seat belts.If the restraint system control unit detects amore severe accident, further components ofthe restraint system are activated independ-ently of each other in certain frontal collisionsituations:RDriver's air bagRFront-passenger front air bagThe front-passenger front air bag is activated ordeactivated depending on the person on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger frontair bag can only deploy in an accident if thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.Observe the information on the PASSENGERAIRBAG OFF indicator lamp (Y page 35).Your vehicle has a two-stage driver's air bag.During the first deployment stage the driver's airbag fills with sufficient propellant gas to reducethe risk of injuries. The front air bag is fullydeployed with the maximum amount of propel-lant gas if a second deployment threshold isreached within a few milliseconds.The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-sioning Devices and the air bag are determinedby evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration oracceleration which occurs at various points inthe vehicle. This process is pre-emptive innature. Deployment should take place in goodtime at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or accelerationand the direction of the force are essentiallydetermined by:Rthe distribution of forces during the collisionRthe collision angleRthe deformation characteristics of the vehicleRthe characteristics of the object with whichthe vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measuredafter a collision has occurred do not play a deci-sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor dothey provide an indication of air bag deploy-ment.The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-out an air bag being deployed. This is the case ifonly parts which are relatively easily deformedare affected and the rate of deceleration is nothigh. Conversely, air bagsmay be deployed eventhough the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigidvehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occursas a result.If the restraint system control unit detects a sideimpact or if the vehicle rolls over, the applicablecomponents of the restraint system are activa-ted independently of each other depending onthe apparent type of accident.RSide impact air bag and pelvis air bag on theside of impact, independently of the Emer-gency Tensioning Device and the use of theseat beltThe side impact air bag on the front-passenger side deploys under the followingconditions:- BabySmart™ detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied or
- the belt tongue is engaged in the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat
RWindow curtain air bag on the side of impact,independently of the use of the seat belt andindependently of whether the front-passenger seat is occupiedREmergency Tensioning Devices, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection in this situationRWindow curtain air bags on the driver's andfront-passenger side in certain situationswhen the vehicle rolls over, if the systemdetermines that deployment can offer addi-tional protection to that provided by the seatbelt
44 Occupant safetySafety
i Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.The different air bag systems work independ-ently of each other.How the air bag system works is determinedby the severity of the accident detected,especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-eration and the apparent type of accident:Rfrontal collisionRside impactRrollover
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe function of the head restraint may beimpaired if you:Rattach objects such as coat hangers to thehead restraints, for exampleRuse head restraint coversIf you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfilltheir intended protective function in the eventof an accident. In addition, objects attachedto the head restraints could endanger othervehicle occupants. There is an increased riskof injury.Do not attach any objects to the headrestraints and do not use head restraint cov-ers.
Method of operationNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints offer additional protectionagainst head and neck injuries. In the event of arear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints on the driver's and front-passengerseats are moved forwards and upwards. Thisprovides better head support.If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints have been triggered in anaccident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver'sseat and the front-passenger seat(Y page 45). Otherwise, the additional protec-tion will not be available in the event of another
rear-end collision. You can see that a NECK-PROhead restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restrainthas been triggered if it is tilted forward and canno longer be adjusted.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thefunctionality of the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at aqualified specialist workshop after a rear-endcollision.
Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO headrestraint/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraint
NECK-PRO head restraints
Do not insert your finger between the cushion ofthe head restraint and the cover. Pay particularattention while resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints.X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction of arrow:.
X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown as far as it will go in the direction ofarrow;.
X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion backwards in thedirection of arrow= until it engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO head restraint.
i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you have difficultyresetting theNECK-PRO head restraints, havethis work carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.
Occupant safety 45
Safety
Z
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Do not insert your finger between the cushion ofthe head restraint and the cover. Pay particularattention while resetting the NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints.X Remove resetting tool: from the vehicledocument wallet.
X Slide resetting tool: into guide; betweenthe NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and therear cover of the head restraint.
X Push resetting tool: downwards until youhear the head restraint deployment mecha-nism engage.
X Pull out resetting tool:.X With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint cushion backwardsin the direction of arrow= until it engages.
X Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-PRO luxury head restraint.
X Put resetting tool: back into the vehicledocument wallet.
i If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints, have this workcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Automatic measures after an acci-dentImmediately after an accident, the followingmeasures are implemented, depending on thetype and severity of the impact:Rthe hazard warning lamps are activatedRthe emergency lighting is activatedRthe vehicle doors are unlockedRthe front side windows are loweredRthe electrically adjustable steering wheel israised
Rthe engine is switched off and the fuel supplyis cut offRvehicles with mbrace: automatic emergencycall
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install a childrestraint system on a rear seat. Children aregenerally better protected there.If a child younger than twelve years and under5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the vehicle:Ralways secure this child in a restraint systemapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Thechild restraint system must be appropriate tothe age, weight and size of the child.Rbe sure to observe the instructions and safetynotes in this section in addition to the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.
G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.
46 Children in the vehicleSafety
G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-dren may burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-tect it with a blanket, for example. If the childrestraint system has been exposed to directsunlight, let it cool down before securing thechild in it. Never leave children unattended inthe vehicle.
Always make sure that all vehicle occupants arepositioned properly in their seats and have cor-rectly fastened their seat belts. Take particularcare with children.Please take note of the safety notes on seatbelts (Y page 36) and the notes on their correctuse (Y page 37).A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where alap/shoulder belt fits properly without a boosterseat.
Special seat belt retractor
G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat belt retrac-tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in aportion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannotbe immediately refastened. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivatethe special seat belt retractor and secure thechild restraint system properly.
All seat belts in the vehicle, except the driver'sseat belt, are equipped with a special seat beltretractor. When activated, the special seat beltretractor ensures that the seat belt cannotslacken once the child seat is secured.
Installing a child restraint system:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.
X Pull the seat belt smoothly out of the belt sashguide.
X Engage seat belt tongue in belt buckle.Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertiareel retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seat beltretractor is enabled.
X Push the child restraint system down so thatthe seat belt is tight and does not loosen.
Removing the child restraint system and deac-tivating the special seat belt retractor:X Make sure you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions.
X Press the release button of the seat beltbuckle and route the seat belt tongue backtowards the belt sash guide.The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
Child restraint systemThe use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesYou can obtain further information about thecorrect child restraint system from any author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect asintended. The child cannot then be restrainedin the event of an accident, heavy braking orsudden changes of direction. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installation instruc-tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,that the base of the child restraint system is
Children in the vehicle 47
Safety
Z
always resting completely on the seat cush-ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, underor behind the child restraint system. Only usechild restraint systems with the original coverdesigned for them. Only replace damagedcovers with genuine covers.
G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installed incor-rectly or is not secured, it can come loose inthe event of an accident, heavy braking or asudden change in direction. The childrestraint system could be thrown about, strik-ing vehicle occupants. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systems prop-erly, even if they are not being used. Makesure that you observe the child restraint sys-tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowingobjects, luggage and loads securely under"Loading guidelines" (Y page 214).
G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securing sys-tems which have been damaged or subjectedto a load in an accident can no longer protectas intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have the secur-ing systems on the child restraint systemchecked at a qualified specialist workshop,before you install a child restraint systemagain.
Securing systems for child restraint systemsinclude:Rthe seat belt systemRthe LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsRTop Tether anchorage points
i If it is absolutely necessary to carry a childon the front-passenger seat, be sure to
observe the instructions on "Child restraintsystems on the front-passenger seat"(Y page 51). This includes information ondeactivating the front-passenger air bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-lowing standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2
A statement by the child restraint manufacturerof compliance with these standards can befound on the instruction label on the childrestraint system. You will also find the state-ment in the instructionmanual providedwith thechild restraint system.Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-rior and on the child restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-ing system
G WARNINGLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systemsdo not offer sufficient protective effect forchildren whose weight is greater than 48 lbs(22 kg) who are secured using the safety beltintegrated in the child restraint system. In theevent of an accident, a child might not berestrained correctly. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystems with which the child is also securedwith the vehicle seat belt. Also secure thechild restraint system with the Top Tetherbelt, if available.
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-lation and operating instructions for the childrestraint system used.Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engagedcorrectly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings
! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat belt couldotherwise be damaged.
48 Children in the vehicleSafety
: LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing ringsX Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystemon both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings:.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings: for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems are installed on the left andright rear seats.Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may alsobe used and can be installed using the vehicle'sseat belt system. Install the child seat accordingto the manufacturer's instructions.
Top Tether
IntroductionTop Tether provides an additional connectionbetween the child restraint system secured witha LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount and thevehicle. This helps reduce the risk of injury evenfurther. If the child restraint system is equippedwith a Top Tether belt, this should always beused.
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the rear seats or the rear seat backrests arenot locked, they could fold forwards in theevent of an accident, heavy braking or suddenchanges of direction. As a result, childrestraint systems cannot perform their inten-ded protective function. Rear seats and rearseat backrests that are not locked can alsocause additional injuries, e.g. in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always lock the rear seats and rear seatbackrests after installing a Top Tether belt.Observe the lock verification indicator. Adjustthe rear seat backrests so that they are in anupright position.
Top Tether anchorages
Top Tether anchorages; are on the cargocompartment floor.
X Remove cargo compartment cover(Y page 219).
X Move the head restraint upwards.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraintsystem with Top Tether. Always comply withthe child restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions when doing so.
X Route Top Tether belt= under the headrestraint between the two head restraint bars.
X Hook Top Tether hook: of Top Tether belt= into Top Tether anchorage;.Make sure that Top Tether beltB is not twis-ted.
Children in the vehicle 49
Safety
Z
X Tension Top Tether belt=. Always complywith the child restraint system manufactur-er's installation instructions when doing so.
X Move head restraint back down again slightlyif necessary (Y page 75). Make sure thatyou do not interferewith the correct routing ofTop Tether belt=.
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation sys-temThe BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system'ssensor system in the front-passenger seatdetects whether a special Mercedes-Benz childrestraint system with a transponder for theBabySmart™ air bag deactivation system hasbeen installed. In this case, the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp lights up and remainslit. The front-passenger front air bag is deacti-vated.When the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock or is in position 0, the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is not lit.
i If the front-passenger front air bag is deac-tivated by the BabySmart™ air bag deactiva-tion system, the following remain enabled onthe front-passenger side:Rthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Device
G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a child restraint systemon the front-passenger seat and thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isoff, the front-passenger front air bag candeploy in the event of an accident. The childcould be struck by the air bag. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Make sure that the front-passenger front airbag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
G WARNINGIf the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. It will not be deployed in theevent of an accident and cannot perform its
intended protective function. A person in thefront-passenger seat could then, for example,come into contact with the vehicle's interior,especially if the person is sitting too close tothe dashboard. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.In this case the front-passenger seat may notbe used. Youmay only transport a child on thefront-passenger seat if they are seated in asuitable rearward or forward-facing childrestraint system. Always observe the childrestraint system manufacturer's installationinstructions.
G WARNINGIf you secure a child in a forward-facing childrestraint system on the front-passenger seatand you position the front-passenger seat tooclose to the dashboard, in the event of anaccident, the child could:Rcome into contact with the vehicle's inte-rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-cator lamp is lit, for exampleRbe struck by the air bag if the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or evenfatal injury.Move the front-passenger seat as far back aspossible. Always make sure that the shoulderbelt strap is correctly routed from the vehiclebelt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide onthe child restraint system. The shoulder beltstrap must be routed forwards and down-wards from the belt sash guide. If necessary,adjust the belt sash guide and the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always observethe information about suitable positioning ofthe child restraint system in this Operator'sManual as well as the child restraint systemmanufacturer's installation instructions.
50 Children in the vehicleSafety
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:shows youwhether the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.The system carries out self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampmust light up for approximately six seconds.If, after the system self-test, thePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:Ris lit: the front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated. It will then not be deployed in theevent of an accident.Ris not lit, the sensor system did not detect achild restraint system with transponder forthe BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.If, in the event of an accident, all deploymentcriteria are met, the front-passenger front airbag is deployed.
G WARNINGElectronic devices on the front-passengerseat can affect the function of the Baby-Smart™ air bag deactivation system, forexample:RLaptopRMobile phoneRTransponder cards such as ski passes oraccess passes
The front-passenger air bag could deploy acci-dentally or not function as intended during anaccident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Do not place any of the devices mentionedabove or similar devices on the front-passenger seat. Be aware of the status of the
front-passenger front air bag both before andduring the journey.
Child restraint system on the front-passenger seat
General notesAccident statistics show that children securedin the rear seats are safer than children securedin the front-passenger seat. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you installthe child restraint system on a rear seat.If it is absolutely necessary to install a childrestraint system on the front-passenger seat,always observe the information on the "Baby-Smart™ air bag deactivation system"(Y page 50).You can thus avoid the risks that could arise asa result of:Ra child restraint system that is not detectedby the BabySmart™ air bag deactivation sys-tem sensor systemRthe unintentional deactivation of the front-passenger front air bagRthe unsuitable positioning of the childrestraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-board
Rearward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always make sure that thefront-passenger front air bag is deactivated.Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is permanently lit (Y page 35) is the front-passenger front air bag deactivated.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.
Forward-facing child restraint systemIf it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-facing child restraint system on the front-passenger seat, always move the front-passenger seat as far back as possible. Theentire base of the child restraint system mustalways rest on the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the childrestraint system must lie as flat as possible
Children in the vehicle 51
Safety
Z
against the backrest of the front-passengerseat. The child restraint system must not touchthe roof or be subjected to a load by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrestand the head restraint position accordingly.Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap iscorrectly routed from the vehicle belt sash guideto the shoulder belt guide on the child restraintsystem. The shoulder belt strap must be routedforwards and downwards from the vehicle beltsash guide. If necessary, adjust the belt sashguide and the front-passenger seat accordingly.Always observe the child restraint system man-ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-tions.
52 Children in the vehicleSafety
Problems with the BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lampon the center console islit.
A special Mercedes-Benz child restraint systemwith a transponder forthe BabySmart™ air bag deactivation systemhas been installed on thefront-passenger seat. The front-passenger air bag has therefore beendeactivated as desired.
G WARNINGThere is no child restraint system installed on the front-passengerseat. The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system is malfunctioning,for example due to electronic devices on the front-passenger seat.There is a risk of injury.X Remove electronic equipment from the front-passenger seat, forexample:RLaptopRMobile phoneRCard with a transponder, such as a ski pass or access pass
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-passenger seat may not be used.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
The 6 restraint sys-tem warning lamp lightsup and/or thePASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp doesnot light up briefly whenyou switch the ignitionon.
G WARNINGThe BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system is malfunctioning.Do not install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat.It is recommended that you install the child restraint system on asuitable rear seat.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Please also refer to the notes about the restraint system warninglamp (Y page 209).
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.
Children in the vehicle 53
Safety
Z
G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in the vehi-cle, even if they are secured in a child restraintsystem, orwith access to an unlocked vehicle.A child's unsupervised access to a vehiclecould result in an accident and/or seriouspersonal injury. The children could:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured throughexcessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accidentwithvehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function
If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in serious inju-ries or an accident. Therefore, when childrenride in the rear always secure the rear doorswith the child-proof locks.
You secure each door individually with the child-proof locks on the rear doors. A door securedwith a child-proof lock cannot be opened frominside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,the door can be opened from the outside.
X To activate: press the child-proof lock leverdown in the direction of arrow;.
X Make sure that the child-proof locks arework-ing properly.
X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.
Override feature for the rear side win-dows
G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.
X To activate/deactivate: press button:.If indicator lamp; is lit, operation of the rearside windows is disabled. Operation is onlypossible using the switches in the driver'sdoor. If indicator lamp; is off, operation ispossible using the switches in the rear com-partment.
54 Children in the vehicleSafety
Pets in the vehicle
G WARNINGIf you leave animals unattended or unsecuredin the vehicle, they could press buttons orswitches, for example.As a result, they could:Ractivate vehicle equipment and becometrapped, for exampleRactivate or deactivate systems, therebyendangering other road users
Unsecured animals could also be flung aroundthe vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-cle occupants. There is a risk of an accidentand injury.Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-cle. Always secure animals properly duringthe journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-port box.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 55)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 56)RAdaptive brake lights (Y page 56)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 57)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)(Y page 58)RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 59)RTrailer stabilization
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® switch offwhen the differential locks are switched on.When the ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® areswitched offRwheels may lock during hard brakingRsteering capabilities are reducedRbraking distance is increasedRvehicle stability in standard driving maneu-vers is increased
Make sure the differential locks are switchedon at all times exceptwhen driving off-road forexample. Switch on the differential locksimmediately when returning from off-roaddriving.
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you areinattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-ther reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Driving safety systems aremerely aids designed to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking in goodtime. Always adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions andmaintain a safe distance from the vehicle infront. Drive carefully.
i Please note that the driving safety systemsdescribed only work as effectively as possibleif there is adequate contact between the tiresand the road surface. Pay particular attentionto the information regarding tires, recommen-ded minimum tire tread depths etc. in the"Wheels and tires" section (Y page 262).In wintry driving conditions, always usewintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snowchains. Only in this way will the driving safetysystems described in this section work aseffectively as possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 55).
Driving safety systems 55
Safety
Z
G WARNINGIf the ABSmalfunctions, other driving systemssuch as the BAS or the ESP® are also switchedoff. Observe indicator and warning lamps thatmay come on as well as messages in the mul-tifunction display that may appear.If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lockduring hard braking, reducing the steeringcapability and extending the braking distance.
G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and braking charac-teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-ally, further driving safety systems are deac-tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-ding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way thatthe wheels do not lock when you brake. Thisallows you to continue steering the vehiclewhenbraking.Provided that the differential locks are notactive, ABS works from a speed of approx-imately 5 mph (8 km/h) upwards, regardless ofroad-surface conditions. ABS works on slipperysurfaces, even if you only brake gently.The yellow ! ABSwarning lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It goes out when the engine is run-ning.
BrakingIf ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel apulsing in the brake pedal.X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-uation is over.
X To make a full brake application: depressthe brake pedal with full force.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indicationof hazardous road conditions, and functions as areminder to take extra care while driving.
Off-road ABSAn ESP® system specifically suited to off-roadterrain is activated automatically once the off-road program is activated.At speeds below 37 mph (60 km/h), the frontwheels lock cyclically during braking. The dig-ging-in effect achieved in the process reducesthe stopping distance on off-road terrain. Thislimits steering capability.
BAS (Brake Assist System)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 55).
G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BASautomatically boosts the braking force, thusshortening the stopping distance.X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Adaptive brake lightsIf you brake sharply from a speed of more than30 mph (50 km/h) or if braking is assisted byBAS, the brake lamps flash rapidly. In this way,traffic traveling behind you is warned in an evenmore noticeable manner.If you brake sharply from a speed of more than45 mph (70 km/h) to a standstill, the hazardwarning lamps are activated automatically. Ifthe brakes are applied again, the brake lampslight up continuously. The hazard warning lampsare deactivated automatically if you drive fasterthan 6 mph (10 km/h). You can also switch offthe hazard warning lamps using the hazardwarning button (Y page 89).
56 Driving safety systemsSafety
ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 55).
G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-ing safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
! Only operate the vehicle for a maximum often seconds on a brake test dynamometer.Switch off the ignition.Application of the brakes by ESP® may oth-erwise destroy the brake system.
! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.Before you operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.
ESP® monitors the driving stability and the trac-tion. Traction is the power transmissionbetween the tires and the road surface.ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp inthe instrument cluster lights up continuouslywhen the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warninglamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not availabledue to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 207) and display messages which maybe displayed in the instrument cluster(Y page 185).If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating fromthe direction desired by the driver, one or morewheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. Ifnecessary, the engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® canalso stabilize the vehicle during braking.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any circum-stances.
X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.
X Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions.
i Only use wheels with the recommended tiresizes. Only then will ESP® function properly.
i If differential locks are switched on, ABS,BAS and ESP® switch off automatically.
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.X If appropriate for the driving conditions,engage the LOW RANGE off-road gear(Y page 162).
Traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-red to the wheel or wheels with traction.Traction control remains active, even if youdeactivate ESP®.Traction control is no longer active above aspeed of approximately 37 mph (60 km/h).Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-vidually if they spin. This enables you to pullaway and accelerate on slippery surfaces, forexample if the road surface is slippery on oneside. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Deactivating/activating ESP®
G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer sta-bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased riskof skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situations descri-bed in the following.
! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated. Youcould otherwise damage the drivetrain.
Driving safety systems 57
Safety
Z
X To deactivate: press button: until theåwarning lamp lights up in the instrumentcluster.
X To activate: press button: until the åwarning lamp goes out in the instrument clus-ter.
ESP® is activated automaticallywhen the engineis started.
i Vehicles with the ECO start/stop func-tion: the ECO start/stop function automati-cally switches the engine off when the vehiclecomes to a stop. The engine starts automati-cally when the driver wants to pull away again.ESP® remains in its previously selected sta-tus. For example, if ESP® was deactivatedbefore the engine was switched off, ESP®remains deactivated when the engine isswitched on again.
It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the follow-ing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelIf you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited andthe drive wheels can spin. The spinning of thewheels results in a cutting action, which pro-vides better grip.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brake.Rand are driving at above 37 mph (60 km/h)(on AMG vehicles above 62mph (100 km/h)),ESP® still intervenes when one wheel reachesits grip limit even though it is deactivated.
i If ESP® is deactivated and one or morewheels start to spin, the÷warning lamp in
the instrument cluster flashes. In such situa-tions, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.
i If ESP® is deactivated, it is reactivated auto-matically if you are driving at above 37 mph(60 km/h) (on AMG vehicles above 62 mph(100 km/h)) or you exceed a certain lateralacceleration.
Trailer stabilization
G WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity cantip over before ESP® can detect this. There isa risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-ing road and weather conditions.
Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® isdeactivated because of a malfunction.If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilizethe vehicle/trailer combination by depressingthe brake firmly.In this situation, ESP® assists you and candetect if the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down by brak-ing and limiting the engine output until the vehi-cle/trailer combination has stabilized.Trailer stabilization is active above speeds ofabout 37 mph (60 km/h).
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-tion)i Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-tion (Y page 55).
G WARNINGIf EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels canlock, e.g. under full braking. This increases therisk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
58 Driving safety systemsSafety
Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 206) as well as displaymessages (Y page 186).EBD monitors and controls the brake pressureon the rear wheels to improve driving stabilitywhile braking.
ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE provides increased brakingsafety. In addition to the braking function,ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 157) and hill start assist (Y page 114).
Theft deterrent locking system
ImmobilizerX To activate: remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.
X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
i The immobilizer is always deactivated whenyou start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot be startedwhen the starter battery is fully charged, theimmobilizer may be faulty. Contact an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center or call1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarm systemis armed after approximately 15 seconds.
X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-Key.i If you then do not open a side door or therear door, the alarm system switches back onagain after approximately 40 seconds.
X To stop the alarm: insert the SmartKey intothe ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.
orX Press the% or& button on the Smart-Key.The alarm is switched off.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRa door using the mechanical keyRthe rear doorRthe hoodThe alarm is also triggered if:Rthe position of the vehicle is changed.Ra window is smashed.The alarm is not switched off, even if you closethe open door that triggered it, for example.
i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-tem (USA only) or Tele Aid system (Canadaonly) initiates a call to the Customer Assis-tance Center automatically. The mbraceemergency call system initiates the call if:Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid service.Rthe Tele Aid service has been activatedproperly.Rthe required mobile phone, power supplyand GPS are available.
Theft deterrent locking system 59
Safety
Z
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutral.Rstart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.
G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.
G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-tionally turned in the ignition lock. This couldcause the engine to be switched off. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects to theSmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings beforeinserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
SmartKey functions
: & To lock the vehicle; % Unlocks the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the% button.If you do not open the vehicle within approx-imately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Ranti-theft protection is reactivated.
X To lock centrally: press the& button.The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe rear doorRthe fuel filler flap
i The turn signals flash once when unlockingand three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 180).When it is dark, the surround lighting also comeson if it is activated in the on-board computer(Y page 179).
60 SmartKeyOp
eningandclosing
Changing the settings of the lockingsystem
You can change the setting of the locking sys-tem in such a way that only the driver's door andthe fuel filler flap are unlocked. This is useful ifyou frequently travel on your own.i If the setting of the locking system ischangedwithin the signal range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button locks orunlocks the vehicle.
X To change the setting: press and hold downthe% and& buttons simultaneouslyfor approximately six seconds until batterycheck lamp: flashes twice.
The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door and fuel fillerflap: press the% button once.
X To unlock centrally: press the% buttontwice.
X To lock centrally: press the& button.
Restoring the factory settings
X Press the% and& buttons simultane-ously for approximately six seconds until bat-tery check lamp: flashes twice.
Mechanical key
General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the rear door, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered (Y page 59).X To end the alarm: insert the SmartKey intothe ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
: Release catch; Mechanical keyX Push release catch: in the direction of thearrow and at the same time remove mechan-ical key; from the SmartKey.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result insevere health problems. There is a risk of fatalinjury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.
SmartKey 61
Openingandclosing
Z
The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Check yournational disposal guidelines. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have thebatteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Checking the battery
X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.If battery check lamp: does not light upduring the test, the battery is discharged.
X Change the battery (Y page 62).
i You can obtain a battery at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.
i Have the batteries replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle
Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 61).
: Battery compartment cover; Mechanical keyX Press mechanical key; into the opening inthe SmartKey in the direction of the arrowuntil battery tray cover: opens. Do not holdthe cover closed while doing so.
X Remove battery tray cover:.
= BatteryX Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.
X Insert the new battery with the positive ter-minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth todo so.
X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree from lint, grease and all other forms ofcontamination.
X Insert the front tabs of battery tray cover:and then press to close it.
X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons onthe vehicle.
62 SmartKeyOp
eningandclosing
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
You cannot lock orunlock the vehicle usingthe SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from adistance of approximately 1.5 ft (50 cm) and try to unlock or lock thevehicle again.
If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 62) and replace it if necessary(Y page 62).
X Unlock (Y page 66) or lock (Y page 66) the vehicle using themechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 66).X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You have lost a Smart-Key.
X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost themechanical key.
X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
The engine cannot bestarted using the Smart-Key.
The SmartKey has been in position 0 (Y page 112) for a considerabletime.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.X Start the engine.
The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to turn the SmartKey again.
If this does not work:X Check the battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 252).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 254).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey 63
Openingandclosing
Z
Doors
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be in oper-ation even after the SmartKey has beenremoved from the ignition, such as the seatadjustment, steering wheel adjustment ormemory function.
If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.
G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or cargo compart-ment unless they are firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the event ofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutral.Rstart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.
Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideIf the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switchoff the alarm (Y page 59).Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.
64 DoorsOp
eningandclosing
X Front doors: pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: pops up.The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X Rear compartment doors: pull handle:up.The door is unlocked.
X Pull door handle;.
Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the inside
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutral.Rstart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe inside.The central locking button does not lock orunlock the fuel filler flap.
X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
You can open a front door from inside the vehi-cle even if it has been locked.Only open the doorwhen the traffic situation permits.If the vehicle has been locked with the centrallocking button:Rand the SmartKey is restored to the factorysettings, the entire vehicle is unlocked if afront door is opened from inside the vehicle.Rand the SmartKey is set to an individual set-ting, only the front door that is opened frominside the vehicle is unlocked.
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with theSmartKey, it does not unlock if you use the cen-tral locking button.
i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked fromthe outside using the SmartKey.
i It is only possible to lock the vehicle cen-trally if all doors are closed.
Doors 65
Openingandclosing
Z
Automatic locking feature
: To deactivate; To activateX To deactivate: press and hold button: forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.
X To activate: press and hold button; forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.
i If you press one of the two buttons and donot hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the vehicle's wheelsare moving at a speed in excess of 9 mph(15 km/h).You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is being tested on a dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic locking func-tion on and off using the on-board computer(Y page 180).
Unlocking the driver's door (mechan-ical key)If the vehicle can no longer be centrallyunlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechani-cal key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-tem will be triggered (Y page 59).Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 61).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of thedriver's door as far as it will go.
X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
Locking the vehicleIf the vehicle can no longer be centrally lockedwith the SmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the tailgate.
X Press the locking button (Y page 65).X Make sure that the locking knobs on thedoors are still visible. Press down the lockingknobs by hand, if necessary.
X Close the driver's door from the outside.
X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 61).
X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of thedriver's door as far as it will go.
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as itwill go to position1.
X Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
66 DoorsOp
eningandclosing
X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate arelocked.
X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey.
i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theftalarm system is not armed.
Rear door
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be in oper-ation even after the SmartKey has beenremoved from the ignition, such as the seatadjustment, steering wheel adjustment ormemory function.
If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.
G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or cargo compart-ment unless they are firmly secured in place.
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the event ofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the reardoor is open when the engine is running, par-ticularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passenger compart-ment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the reardoor. Never drive with the rear door open.
! The tailgate swings out to the side whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance.
i Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargocompartment. Otherwise, you could lockyourself out.
OpeningYou can only open the rear door after unlockingit first.X Press the% button on the SmartKey.
X Press release button: and pull door han-dle;.
X Open the rear door.
Rear door 67
Openingandclosing
Z
ClosingX Push the rear door closed from outside thevehicle.
X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the&button on the SmartKey.
Side windows
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhile closing the side windows, body parts inthe closing area could become trapped. Thereis a risk of injury.When closing make sure that no parts of thebody are in the closing area. If somebodybecomes trapped, release the switch or pressthe switch to open the side window again.
G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the side win-dow and the door frame as the side windowmoves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-body becomes trapped, release the switch orpull the switch to close the sidewindow again.
Opening and closing the side win-dowsThe switches for all side windows are located onthe driver's door. There is also a switch on eachdoor for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door take prece-dence.The side windows cannot be operated from therear when the override feature for the side win-dows is activated (Y page 54).
: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition.
X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.X To open automatically: press the corre-sponding switch briefly beyond the point ofresistance.The side window opens completely.
X To interrupt automatic operation: press orpull the corresponding switch again.
i You can continue to operate the side win-dows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function is avail-able for up to five minutes or until the driver'sor front-passenger door is opened.
i The side windows cannot be operated fromthe rear when the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 54).
Convenience openingi The convenience opening feature can onlybe operated using the SmartKey. The Smart-Keymust be close to the driver's door handle.
You can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carryout the following functions simultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroofRswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver'sseat and front-passenger seat
68 Side windowsOp
eningandclosing
X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.
X Press and hold the% button until the sidewindows and the sliding sunroof are in thedesired position.
X To interrupt convenience opening: releasethe% button.
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.
Operationi The "convenience closing feature" can onlybe operated using the key. The SmartKeymust be close to the driver's door handle.
When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-ously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroofX Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.
X Press and hold the& button until the sidewindows and the sliding sunroof are fullyclosed.
X Make sure that all the side windows and thesliding sunroof are closed.
X To interrupt convenience closing: releasethe& button.
Problems with the side windows
G WARNINGClosing the sidewindowswith increased forceor without the anti-entrapment feature couldlead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure
that nobody can become trapped when clos-ing the side windows.
Problem: a side window cannot be closedbecause objects are trapped between theside window and the door frame.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.Problem: a side window cannot be closedand you cannot see the cause.If a sidewindow is obstructed during closing andreopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull thecorresponding switch again until the side win-dow has closed.
If a side window is obstructed again during clos-ing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull thecorresponding switch again until the side win-dow has closed.i If a side window no longer opens or closesdue to a malfunction, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free ofsnow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions mayoccur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could bedamaged.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be openedor closed as a result of a malfunction, contacta qualified specialist workshop.
! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged ifwater enters the vehicle interior.
i Resonance noises can occur in addition tothe usual airflow noises when the sliding sun-roof is open. They are caused by minor pres-sure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroof oropen a side window slightly to reduce or elim-inate these noises.
Sliding sunroof 69
Openingandclosing
Z
Opening and closing the sliding sun-roof
Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2(Y page 112) in the ignition.
X Press or pull the¡ switch in the corre-sponding direction.
X To open automatically: press the¡ switch briefly beyond the point of resist-ance in the direction of arrow;.The sliding sunroof opens completely.
X To interrupt automatic operation: press orpull the¡ switch again.i When opening and raising the roof, auto-matic operation is only available if the slidingsunroof is in the closed position.
Operating the sliding sunroof man-uallyThe actuator is located in the cargo compart-ment, on the left-hand side behind the rear walltrim.
X Open the rear door.X Pull off edge protection: from the door pillarin the direction of arrow;.
X Pull away rear panel trim= as far as neces-sary in the direction of arrow? until theelectrical connections can be accessed.
X Disconnect the electrical connections.X Remove rear panel trim= completely.
X Take lug wrenchA out of the vehicle tool kit(Y page 248).
X Place lugwrenchA onto the hexagonal nut ofthe actuator.
X To open: turn lug wrenchA counter-clock-wise.
X To close: turn lug wrenchA clockwise.
70 Sliding sunroofOp
eningandclosing
X Reconnect the electrical connections.X Re-install rear panel trim=.When doing so, hook lugsB of rear paneltrim= into vehicle side wallC.
X Re-install edge protection:.X Close the rear door.
Problems with the sliding sunroof
G WARNINGYou could be severely or even fatally injuredwhen closing the sliding sunroof withincreased closing force or if the anti-entrap-ment feature is deactivated. Make sure thatnobody can become trappedwhen closing thesliding sunroof.
! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be openedor closed as a result of a malfunction, contacta qualified specialist workshop.
Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed andyou cannot see the cause.If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during clos-ing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks,pull the¡ switch in the overhead controlpanel down to the point of resistance and holdit until the sliding sunroof is closed.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks,pull the¡ switch in the overhead controlpanel down to the point of resistance and holdit until the sliding sunroof is closed.
Sliding sunroof 71
Openingandclosing
Z
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Correct driver's seat position
: Steering wheel; Seat belts= BackrestX Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjust-ment (Y page 72).
X Make sure that seat= is adjusted properly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 74)
When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag aspossibleRyou are sitting in a normal upright positionRyou can fasten the seat belt properlyRyou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical position
Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supportedRyou can depress the pedals properlyX Check whether the head restraint is adjustedproperly (Y page 74).When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the back ofyour head is supported at eye level by thecenter of the head restraint.
X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 72).
X Make sure that steering wheel: is adjustedproperly.Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 78).
When adjusting the steering wheel, make surethat:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bentRyou can move your legs freelyRyou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly
X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 36).
X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 38).
The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your shoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints
X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmirrorand the exteriormirrors in such away that youhave a good view of road and traffic condi-tions (Y page 80).
X Vehicles with a memory function: save theseat, steering wheel and exterior mirror set-tings with the memory function (Y page 82).
Seats
Important safety notes
G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.
72 SeatsSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock.
G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"(Y page 40) and "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 46).
G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.
G WARNINGIf the head restraints are not installed or notadjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-tection as intended. There is an increased riskof injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.
Make sure that you do not rotate the headrestraints of the front and rear seats whenadjusting the head restraints. Otherwise, youcannot adjust the height and angle of the headrestraints correctly.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close aspossible to your head.
G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated and prop-erly secured in an appropriately sized childrestraint system or booster seat recommen-ded for the size and weight of the child. Foradditional information, see the "Children inthe vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries is sig-nificantly increased if the child restraints arenot properly secured in the vehicle and/or thechild is not properly secured in the childrestraint.
! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seat heat-ing should also not be used to dry the seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on the seats.Do not place sharp objects on the seatcushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. Theseats should only be occupied by passen-gers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulating materi-als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,child seats or booster seats.
! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell under or behind the seats whenmov-ing the seats back. There is a risk that theseats and/or the objects could be damaged.
! When the rear bench seat is folded for-wards, the front seats cannot be moved totheir rearmost position. You could otherwisedamage the seats and the rear bench seat.
! Make sure that the sun visor is folded upbefore adjusting the backrest and headrestraint height. The head restraint and sun
Seats 73
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
visor could otherwise collide when the headrestraint is fully extended.
i If the front door is open, the seats can beadjusted for up to 30 minutes after the igni-tion has been switched off.
i The rear-compartment head restraints canbe removed (Y page 75).For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
i You can find further information aboutenlarging the cargo compartment (folding therear bench seat forwards) on (Y page 218).
Adjusting the seats electrically! Make sure that the cup holder on the centerconsole is folded down before you move thefront-passenger seat forwards.
: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle
i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 82).
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.
Observe the following when adjusting the headrestraints:X Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats.Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height andangle of the head restraints correctly.
X Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeas possible to your head.
Adjusting the front seat head restraintheight
: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angleX Slide head restraint adjustment button: upor down in the direction of the arrow.
74 SeatsSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-handside bolster: into the desired position.
X To adjust the angle of the head restraint:push or pull the head restraint in the directionof arrow;.
Resetting the front seat head restraintsIt is necessary to reset the front seat headrestraints after the voltage supply has beeninterrupted, e.g. if the battery has been com-pletely discharged or disconnected.X Make sure that the cup holder on the centerconsole is folded down (Y page 220).
X Move the seat as far forward as possible andthe head restraint in as far as possible.
Rear seat head restraints
Important safety notesG WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed and adjus-ted correctly, they cannot provide protectionas intended. There is an increased risk ofinjury in the head and neck area, e.g. in theevent of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraints instal-led. Before driving off, make sure for everyvehicle occupant that the center of the headrestraint supports the back of the head atabout eye level.
Observe the following when adjusting the headrestraints:X Do not rotate the head restraints of the frontand rear seats.Otherwise, you cannot adjust the height andangle of the head restraints correctly.
X Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeas possible to your head.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight
X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, pressrelease catch:.
X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.
X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.
Installing/removing the rear seat headrestraintsX To remove: pull the head restraint up to thestop.
X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.
X To re-install: place the head restraint in theguides of the backrest.i The notches on the guide rodmust be on theleft-hand side when viewed in the direction oftravel.
X Push the head restraint down until you hear itengage in position.
Seats 75
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
Adjusting the multicontour seat
: To adjust the thigh cushion; To adjust the backrest contour in the lumbar
region= To adjust the backrest contour in the upper
back region? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-
restYou can adjust the contour of the front seatsindividually so as to provide optimum supportfor your back and sides.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1or 2 (Y page 112) in the ignition lock.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimum sup-port for your back.
: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour
Switching the seat heating on/off
General notes
G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively high tempera-tures may be affected or they may even sufferburn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.
The red indicator lamps in the button indicatethe heating level you have selected.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.One or more of the indicator lamps in the seatheating button are flashing.
Switching the front-seat heating on/off
X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i The system automatically switches fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.
76 SeatsSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
The system automatically switches offapproximately 35 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.
Switching the rear-seat heating on/off
X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.
X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.i The system automatically switches fromlevel 3 to level 2 after approximately eightminutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 35 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.
Problems with the seat heatingIf the on-board voltage is too low, the seat heat-ing is switched off automatically.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear window defrosteror interior lighting.If the on-board voltage is only interruptedbriefly, the seat heating will switch back onautomatically. If the seat heating is notswitched on automatically:
X Switch on the seat heating manually(Y page 76)
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Switching on/off
Seat ventilation is only available for the frontseats.The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you have selected.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2(Y page 112) in the ignition lock.
X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.i If you open the side windows and the slidingsunroof using the SmartKey (Y page 68), thedriver's seat ventilation automaticallyswitches to the highest level.
X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.
Problems with the seat ventilationIf one or all of the indicator lamps in the seatventilation button are flashing, the seat ventila-tion has switched off automatically. The vehi-cle's electrical system voltage is too lowbecause too many electrical consumers areswitched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear window defrosteror interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, theseat ventilation will switch back on automat-ically.
Seats 77
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if you dothe following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-ing wheel andmirror and fasten your seat beltbefore starting the engine.
G WARNINGChildren could injure themselves if theyadjust the steering wheel. There is a risk ofinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel canstill be adjusted when there is no SmartKey inthe ignition lock.
Adjusting the steering wheel
: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
i If the driver's door is open, the steeringwheel can be adjusted for up to 30 minutesafter the ignition has been switched off.
i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 79)RStoring settings (Y page 82)
Steering wheel heating
Activating/deactivating
: To switch on the steering-wheel heating; To switch off the steering-wheel heating= Indicator lampThe steering-wheel heating heats the leatherareas of the steering wheel.X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey isin position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Turn the catch in the direction of arrow:.Indicator lamp= lights up.
X To deactivate:make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.
X Turn the catch in the direction of arrow;.Indicator lamp= goes out.
i The steering wheel heating does not switchoff automatically.
i The steering wheel heating may switch offtemporarily if:Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior isabove 86 ‡ (30 †)Rthe temperature of the steering wheel isabove 95 ‡ (35 †)
Indicator lamp= remains on.
i The steering wheel heating is deactivated ifyou remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.
78 Steering wheelSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Problems with the steering wheel heat-ing
: To switch on the steering-wheel heating; To switch off the steering-wheel heating= Indicator lampIf steering wheel heating indicator lamp= isflashing, the steering wheel heating hasswitched off automatically. The vehicle's elec-trical system voltage is too low because toomany electrical consumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear window defrosteror interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, thesteering wheel heating will switch back onautomatically.
Steeringwheel EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel and the driver's seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the seat andthe steering wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRpress one of the memory function memorybuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving
The adjustment process is stopped.
G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.
! Do not activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-ture, if the seat backrest is reclined too farbackwards. This can damage the front or rearseats. You must first move the backrest to avertical position.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting inand out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer(Y page 181).
Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel moves upwards and towardsthe dashboard if:Ryou remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock orRyou open the driver's door with the SmartKeyin position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock
i The steering wheel only moves upwards andtowards the dashboard if it has not alreadyreached the upper steering limiter.
Steering wheel 79
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
Position of the steering wheel for driv-ingThe steering wheel is moved to the last selectedposition when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignition lockThe last position of the steering column is storedwhen you switch off the ignition or when youstore the setting with the memory function(Y page 82).
Mirrors
Rear-view mirrorX Adjust the rear-view mirror by hand so youhave a good overview of the traffic conditionsbehind you.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge the dis-tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-dent.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 112).
X Press button: to select the left-hand exte-rior mirror
orX Press button; to select the right-hand exte-rior mirror.
X Press button= up, down, or to the left orright until you have adjusted the exterior mir-ror to the correct position. You should have agood overview of traffic conditions.
i The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.
i The exterior mirrors are heated automati-cally if the rear window defroster is switchedon and the outside temperature is low.
Folding the exteriormirrors in/out elec-trically
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 112).
X Briefly press:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.
i If you are driving faster than 9 mph(15 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-rior mirrors.
80 MirrorsSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Setting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or com-pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must bereset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise notfold in when you select the "Fold inmirrors whenlocking" function in the on-board computer(Y page 181).X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1in the ignition lock (Y page 112).
X Briefly press:.
Folding the exterior mirrors in/outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 181):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automati-cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle andthen open the driver's or front-passengerdoor.
Exterior mirror pushed out of positionX Press button: repeatedly until you hear themirror engage in position.The mirror housing is engaged again and youcan adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 80).
Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror onthe driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the sen-sor in the rear-view mirror
i The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interior light-ing is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior mir-ror on the front-passenger side
Setting/storing the parking position
Using reverse gear
: Left-hand exterior mirror; Right-hand exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger side exte-rior mirror in such a way that you can see therear wheel on that side as soon as you engagereverse gear. You can store this position.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-tion lock (Y page 112).
X Press button; for the exterior mirror on thefront-passenger side.
X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.
X Use adjustment button= to adjust the exte-rior mirror to a position that allows you to seethe rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.
Mirrors 81
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
i If you shift the transmission to another posi-tion, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the driving position.
Using the memory button
: Left-hand exterior mirror; Right-hand exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger side exte-rior mirror in such a way that you can see therear wheel on that side as soon as you engagereverse gear. This setting can be stored usingmemory button M?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2(Y page 112) in the ignition lock.
X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. In theexterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curbshould be visible.
X Press memory button M? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= within threeseconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.
X If the mirror moves out of position, repeat thesteps.
Calling up a stored parking position set-ting
: Left-hand exterior mirror; Right-hand exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory buttonX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 112)in the ignition lock.
X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.
X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger sidemoves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exterior mirroron the driver's side
Memory functions
Storing settings
G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNINGWhen thememory function adjusts the seat orsteering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
82 Memory functionsSeats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
pants – particularly children – could becometrapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is making adjust-ments, make sure that no one has any bodyparts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-diately release the memory function positionbutton. The adjustment process is stopped.
G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they acti-vate the memory function, particularly whenunattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
With the memory function, you can store up tothree different settings, e.g. for three differentpeople.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exterior mirrorson the driver's and front-passenger sides
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2(Y page 112) or that the respective door isopen.
X Adjust the seat (Y page 74) and head restraint(Y page 74).
X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel(Y page 78) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 80).
X Press the M memory button.X Press one of memory buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selected stor-age position.
Calling up a stored setting! If you want to move the seat from the fullyreclined position to a stored seat position,first raise the backrest using the seat switch.The seat could otherwise be damaged.
X Press and hold the relevant memory button 1,2 or 3, until the seat, head restraints, steeringwheel and mirrors are in the stored position.i The setting procedure is interrupted as soonas you release the memory button.
Memory functions 83
Seats,steerin
gwheelandmirrors
Z
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Exterior lighting
Important safety notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you drive with the lights switched oneven during the daytime. In some countries,operation of the headlamps varies due to legalrequirements and self-imposed obligations.
Light switch
Operation! Switch off the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps when you leave the vehicle. Thisprevents the battery from discharging.
! If the battery has been excessively dis-charged, the parking lamps or standing lampsare automatically switched off to enable thenext engine start. Always park your vehiclesafely and sufficiently lit according to legalstandards. Avoid the continuous use of theT parking lamps for several hours. If pos-sible, switch on theX right or theW leftstanding lamp.
1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,
license plate and instrument clusterlighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIf you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The turn signals, high-beam headlamps and thehigh-beam flasher are operated using the com-bination switch (Y page 88).The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey inposition 0 in the ignition lock.
Low-beam headlamps
1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,
license plate and instrument clusterlighting
84 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsX To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-tion 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L.The L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.
Daytime running lamps
Daytime running lamps in Canada
1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,
license plate and instrument clusterlighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsThe daytime running lamps function is requiredby law in Canada. It cannot therefore be deac-tivated.X Turn the light switch toÃ.With the engine running: depending on theambient light, the daytime running lamps orthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.When the low-beam headlamps are switchedon, the L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.
When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever from adrive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after threeminutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
light switch to T, the daytime running lampsand parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings take prec-edence over the daytime running lamps.
Daytime running lamps in the USA
1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,
license plate and instrument clusterlighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsIn the USA, the daytime running lamps are deac-tivated upon delivery from the factory.X To activate the daytime running lamps:activate the daytime running lamps functionin the on-board computer (Y page 179).
X Turn the light switch toÃ.With the engine running: depending on theambient light, the daytime running lamps orthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.When the low-beam headlamps are switchedon, the L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.
If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.
Automatic headlamp mode
G WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weather
Exterior lighting 85
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-ing at all times.
1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,
license plate and instrument clusterlighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsX To switch on automatic headlamp mode:turn the light switch toÃ.SmartKey in position1 in the ignition lock: theparking lamps are switched on or off auto-matically depending on the brightness of theambient lightWith the engine running: if you have activatedthe daytime running lamps function in the on-board computer, the daytime running lampsor the low-beam headlamps are switched onor off automatically depending on the bright-ness of the ambient light.When the low-beam headlamps are switchedon, the L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.
Rear fog lamp
1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,
license plate and instrument clusterlighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampX To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 orstart the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up.
X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.
86 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers
Parking lamps
1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,
license plate and instrument clusterlighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampX To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
Standing lamps
1 W Left-hand standing lamps2 X Right-hand standing lamps3 T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,
license plate and instrument clusterlighting
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps
5 L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsB R Rear fog lampSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey should not be in the ignition lock orit should be in position 0 (Y page 112).
X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand side ofthe vehicle) or X (right-hand side of thevehicle).
Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically if the"Wipe with washer fluid" function is operatedten times while the lights are on and the engineis running (Y page 96). When you switch off
Exterior lighting 87
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
the ignition, the automatic headlamp cleaningsystem is reset and counting is resumed from 0.
Combination switch
Turn signal
: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.
X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the direction ofarrow; or?.
High-beam headlamps
: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, left
X To switch on the high-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-tion 2 or start the engine.
X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:.In theà position, the high-beam head-lamps are only switched onwhen it is dark andthe engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.
X To switch off the high-beam headlamps:move the combination switch back to its nor-mal position.The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-ment cluster goes out.
High-beam flasher
: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the igni-tion lock to position1 or2, or start the engine.
X Pull the combination switch briefly in thedirection of arrow=.
88 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers
Hazard warning lamps
X To switch on the hazard warning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch on aturn signal using the combination switch, onlythe turn signal lamp on the correspondingside of the vehicle will flash.
X To switch off the hazard warning lamps:press button:.
The hazard warning lamps automatically switchon if:Ran air bag is deployed orRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices are trig-gered, orRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speedof above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to astandstill
The hazard warning lamps switch on automati-cally if an air bag or the Emergency TensioningDevices are triggered and the SmartKey is inposition 1 in the ignition lock.The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-cation.
i The hazard warning lamps still operate if theignition is switched off.
Headlamps and indicator lamps fog-ged up on the insideThe headlamps and the indicator lamps in theexterior mirrors may fog up on the inside if thereis high atmospheric humidity.X Drive with the headlamps switched on.The level of moisture diminishes, dependingon the length of the journey and the weatherconditions (humidity and temperature).
If the level of moisture does not diminish:X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting on= t Switches the cargo compartment
lamp/rear compartment lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting con-
trol on
Interior lighting 89
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
Rear-compartment overhead control panel: p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
Interior lighting control
General notesThe interior lighting functions are automaticallydeactivated after some time except forwhen theSmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock.This prevents your vehicle's battery from dis-charging.The brightness of the ambient lighting may beset using the control on the instrument cluster(Y page 171).
Automatic interior lighting control
Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting on= t Switches the cargo compartment
lamp/rear compartment lighting on/off
? | Switches the front interior lighting/automatic interior lighting control off
A p Switches the right-hand front readinglamp on/off
B Switches the automatic interior lighting con-trol on
X To switch on: move switchB to the centerposition.
The interior lighting switches on automaticallywhen it is dark if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockX To switch off: press the | symbol onswitchB.
The interior lighting remains switched off evenwhen it is dark if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a door.Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.The interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. You can activate this delayed switch-offusing the on-board computer (Y page 180).When a front door is opened, the front interiorlighting comes on. When a rear door is opened,the rear interior lighting comes on. In addition,the courtesy lights come on.
i If a door remains open and the SmartKey isnot in the ignition lock, the interior lightingswitches off after a short while.
Manual interior lighting control
Front interior lighting! If the interior lighting has been switched onmanually, it will not be switched off automat-ically.This can cause the starter battery to dis-charge.Make sure that the interior lighting does notremain switched on too long after the enginehas been switched off.
90 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers
Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting on= t Switches the cargo compartment
lamp/rear compartment lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand front reading
lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting con-
trol onX To switch on: press the c symbol onswitchB.
X To switch off: set switchB to the centerposition.
Reading lamps
Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting on= t Switches the cargo compartment
lamp/rear compartment lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control off
A p Switches the right-hand front readinglamp on/off
B Switches the automatic interior lighting con-trol on
X To switch on/off: press the p button.
Cargo compartment lampG WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the reardoor is open when the engine is running, par-ticularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passenger compart-ment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the reardoor. Never drive with the rear door open.
! Switch off the cargo compartment lamp ifyou wish to leave the rear door open for alonger period. The battery may otherwise dis-charge.
! Do not close the rear door while lock: isengaged at the bottom. Otherwise, you coulddamage lock:.
Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting on= t Switches the cargo compartment
lamp/rear compartment lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand front reading
lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting con-
trol on
Interior lighting 91
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
X To switch on/off: press the t button.i If you open the rear door, the cargo com-partment lamp comes on. You will then beunable to switch it off using the t button.Switch off the cargo compartment lamp if youwish to leave the rear door open for a longerperiod. This prevents the battery from dis-charging.
X Open the rear door.X To switch off with the rear door open:press lock: down in the direction of thearrow until it engages.The cargo compartment lamp is switched off.
X To switch on with the rear door open:press lock cylinder; on the door handle.The cargo compartment lamp resumes itsnormal function.
Rear compartment lighting
Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting on= t Switches the cargo compartment
lamp/rear compartment lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/
automatic interior lighting control off
A p Switches the right-hand reading lampon/off
B Switches the automatic interior lighting con-trol on
X To switch on/off: press the t button.i The rear compartment lighting switches onwhen you open a rear door. You will then beunable to switch it off using the t button.If you leave the rear doors open for a longtime, switch the rear compartment lightingoff. This prevents the battery from discharg-ing.
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electrical con-tacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electrical con-tacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work onthe Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.
Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or if itsglass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lamps designedfor that purpose. Only install spare bulbs of thesame type and the specified voltage.Marks on the glass tube reduce the service lifeof the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tube withyour bare hands. If necessary, clean the glass
92 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers
tube when cold with alcohol or spirit and rub itoff with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.Do not allow bulbs to come into contact withliquids.Xenon bulbsBulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times. Havethe headlamp setting checked regularly.LED modulesYou can replace neither Xenon bulbs nor LEDbulbs. Have LEDmodules replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times. Havethe headlamp setting checked regularly.Before changing bulbsHave the following bulbs replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop:RAdditional turn signals in the exterior mirrorsRHigh-mounted brake lampRHigh-beam/low-beam headlamps (Xenonbulbs)RDaytime running lampsRParking lamps/standing lampsRLicense plate lamp
i Individual segments of the license platelamp LEDsmay fail without a displaymessageappearing in the multifunction display. Regu-larly check the license plate lamp. If neces-sary, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
You can replace the following bulbs:RTurn signal lamp (front)RBrake/tail lampRTurn signal lamp (rear)RTail lamps/standing lampsRBackup LightRRear fog lampRSide marker lampsOther bulbsThere are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself. Only replace thebulbs listed (Y page 93). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself replaced at a quali-fied specialist workshop.If you require assistance replacing bulbs, con-sult a qualified specialist workshop.
Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Even minor contamination canburn into the glass surface and reduce the ser-vice life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free clothor only touch the base of the bulb when instal-ling.Only use bulbs of the correct type.If the new bulb still does not light up, consult aqualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times. Havethe headlamp setting checked regularly.
Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types
Front bulbsYou can replace the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.
: Turn signal lamp: 1156 NA; Side marker lamp: T 4 W
Rear bulbsYou can replace the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.
Replacing bulbs 93
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
: Tail lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W; Brake lamp/tail lamp: P 21/5 W= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W? Side marker lamp: T 4 WA Backup lamp: P 21 WB Rear fog lamp: P 21 W
Changing the front bulbs
Turn signal! Make sure that the protective grille does nothit any painted surfaces.You could otherwise damage the paintwork.
! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.
Turn signal lamp with protection grille (AMG vehi-cles)X Switch off the lights.X AMG vehicles: pull protection grille: in thedirection of the arrow out of mounting;.
X Fold up protection grille:.
Example: turn signal lampX Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws=.X Remove lens?.
Example: turn signal lampX Turn bulbA counter-clockwise, applyingslight pressure, and remove it from the bulbholder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and,applying slight pressure, turn it clockwiseuntil it engages.
X Install lens?.X Replace and tighten screws=.X AMG vehicles: fold down protection grille:and allow it to engage in mounting;.
Side marker lamps! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.
94 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers
Front side marker lamp (example)The bulbs of the front and rear side markerlamps are changed in the same way.X Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws:.X Remove housing;.
X Remove dust cover=.X Push the catch to the side and pull the bulbholder with the bulb out of housing;.
X Lightly press bulb?, turn it counter-clock-wise and pull it out.
X Insert the new bulb and, applying slight pres-sure, turn it clockwise until it engages.
X Insert the bulb holder into housing;.
X Attach dust cover=.X Insert housing;.X Replace and tighten screws:.
Changing the rear bulbs
Protection grille (AMG vehicles)! Make sure that the protective grille does nothit any painted surfaces.You could otherwise damage the paintwork.
Protection grille (AMG vehicles)You must remove the protective grille beforeyou can change the bulbs in the tail lamps.X Unscrew screws;.X Swing protection grille: to the right.X After changing the bulbs, swing protectiongrille: to the left.
X Tighten screws;.
Tail lamps! When installing the lens, make sure that theseal is positioned correctly.
! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.
Replacing bulbs 95
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
X Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws:.X Remove lens;.
= Turn signal? Brake/tail lampA Tail lamps/standing lampsX Turn the corresponding bulb counter-clock-wise, applying slight pressure, and remove itfrom the bulb holder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and,applying slight pressure, turn it clockwiseuntil it engages.
X Install lens;.X Replace and tighten screws:.X AMG vehicles: secure the protection grille(Y page 95).
Backup lamp/rear fog lamp! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.
Example: rear fog lampX Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws;.X Remove lens:.
X Turn bulb= counter-clockwise, applyingslight pressure, and remove it from the bulbholder.
X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder and,applying slight pressure, turn it clockwiseuntil it engages.
X Install lens:.X Replace and tighten screws;.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wiperson/off! Do not operate the windshield wipers whenthe windshield is dry, as this could damagethe wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-lected on the windshield/rear window canscratch the glass if wiping takes place whenthe windshield/rear window is dry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, always usewasher fluid when operating the windshieldwipers.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on thewindshield/rear window after the vehicle hasbeen washed in an automatic car wash, thismay be due to wax or other residue. Clean thewindshield/rear window with washer fluidafter an automatic car wash.
! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due tooptical influences and the windshield becom-ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.This could then damage the windshield wiperblades or scratch the windshield.For this reason, you should always switch offthe windshield wipers in dry weather.
96 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield willno longer be wiped properly. This could preventyou from observing the traffic conditions,thereby causing an accident.
Combination switch1 $ Windshield wipers off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set
to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipeC î To wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the corre-sponding position.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted if you stop thevehicle and open a front door. This protectspeople getting into and out of the vehicle frombeing sprayed with water.Intermittent wiping continueswhen all doors areclosed and:Ryou shift the automatic transmission to driveposition D or reverse gear RorRyou change the wipe setting on the combina-tion switch.
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automatically accordingto the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,the rain sensor is more sensitive than inthe Ä position, causing the windshield wip-ers to wipe more frequently.
Switching the rear window wiper on/off
Combination switch: è Switch2 b Wipes with washer fluid3 I Switches on intermittent wiping4 0 Switches off intermittent wiping5 b Wipes with washer fluidX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.
X Turn switch: on the combination switch tothe corresponding position.When the rear window wiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.i The rear window wiper comes on automati-cally if you shift the selector lever to R whilethe windshield wiper are on.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.
! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, makesure that you touch only the wiper arm of thewiper.
! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from the wind-shield.
Windshield wipers 97
Lightsandwindshieldwipers
Z
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without awiper blade back onto the windshield/rearwindow.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you release thewindshield wiper arm without a wiper bladeand it falls onto thewindshield, thewindshieldmay be damaged by the force of the impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Removing the wiper blades
: Windshield wiper arm; Wiper blade= Locking spring? Hinge pieceX Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Fold wiper arm: away from the windshielduntil it engages.
X Position wiper blade; horizontally.X Press locking spring=.X Slide wiper blade;with hinge piece? fromwiper arm:.
Installing the wiper blade
: Windshield wiper arm; Wiper blade= Locking spring? Hinge pieceX Slide wiper arm: into new wiper blade;with hinge piece?.
X Engage locking spring= into the end of thewiper arm.
X Make sure that wiper blade; is seated cor-rectly.
X Fold wiper arm: back onto the windshield.
Problems with the windshield wipers
The windshield wipers are obstructedLeaves or snow, for example, may be obstruct-ing the windshield wiper movement. The wipermotor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.
X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers are inoperativeThe windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combina-tion switch.
X Have the windshield wipers checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
98 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Overview of climate control systems
Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on the fol-lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fogup. This could prevent you from observing thetraffic conditions, thereby causing an accident.Climate control regulates the temperature andthe humidity in the vehicle interior and filtersundesirable substances from the air.Dual-zone automatic climate control is onlyoperational when the engine is running. Opti-mum operation is only achieved if you drive withthe side windows and sliding sunroof closed.The climatic comfort deteriorateswhilst the slid-ing sunroof is open. The automatic climate con-trol cannot maintain the set temperature withthe sliding sunroof open. You have to adjust theclimate control manually.
i The residual heat function can only be acti-vated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 108).
i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period duringwarm weather, e.g. using the convenienceopening feature (Y page 68). This will speedup the cooling process and the desired vehi-cle interior temperature will be reached morequickly.
i The integrated filter can filter out most par-ticles of dust, and completely filters out pol-len. A clogged filter reduces the amount of airsupplied to the vehicle interior. For this rea-son, you should always observe the intervalfor replacing the filter, which is specified inthe Maintenance Booklet. As it depends onenvironmental conditions, e.g. heavy air pol-
lution, the interval may be shorter than statedin the Maintenance Booklet.
Overview of climate control systems 99
Climatecontrol
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 105); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 105)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 105)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 103)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 107)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 105)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 107)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 105)E Increases the airflow (Y page 105)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 105)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 102)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 105)
100 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol
USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 105); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 105)= Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 106)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 103)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 107)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 105)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 107)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 105)E Increases the airflow (Y page 105)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 105)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 102)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 105)
Optimum use of dual-zone climatecontrolThe following contains notes and recommenda-tions on optimum use of dual-zone climate con-trol.RActivate climate control using theà andÁ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà andÁ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the defrosting function briefly untilthe windshield is clear again.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. ifthere are unpleasant outside odors or when ina tunnel. Thewindows could otherwise fog up,
since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle inair-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the temper-ature settings on the driver's side for thefront-passenger side as well. The indicatorlamp in theá button goes out.
Overview of climate control systems 101
Climatecontrol
Operating the climate control sys-tems
Switching climate control on/off
Points to observe before use
G WARNINGWhen the climate control system is deactiva-ted, the outside air supply and circulation arealso deactivated. Only choose this setting fora short time.Otherwise thewindows could fogup, impairing visibility and endangering youand others.
Switching climate control on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X To switch on: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-matic mode.
orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.
X To switch off: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.
102 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol
Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification
General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will notbe cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up morequickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normaland not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off! If the cooling with air dehumidification does not switch on, it is possible that the climate controlsystem has lost coolant.Have the cooling with air dehumidification checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 105); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 105)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 105)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 103)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 107)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 105)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 107)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 105)E Increases the airflow (Y page 105)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 105)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 102)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 105)
Operating the climate control systems 103
Climatecontrol
Z
X To activate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button lights up.
X To deactivate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionhas a delayed switch-off feature.
USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 105); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 105)= Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 106)? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 103)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 107)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 105)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 107)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 105)E Increases the airflow (Y page 105)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 105)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 102)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 105)X To activate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button lights up.
X To deactivate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionhas a delayed switch-off feature.
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" functionWhen you press theÁ button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three times or remains off.You can no longer switch on the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
104 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol
Setting climate control to automatic
G WARNINGIf you switch off the cooling function, the vehi-cle will not be cooled when weather condi-tions are warm. The windows can fog up morequickly. Window fogging may impair visibilityand endanger you and others.
In automaticmode, the set temperature ismain-tained at a constant level. The system automat-ically regulates the temperature of the dis-pensed air, the airflow and the air distribution.Automatic mode will achieve optimal operationif cooling with air dehumidification is also acti-vated. If desired, cooling with air dehumidifica-tion can be deactivated.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 112)in the ignition lock.
X Set the desired temperature.X To switch on: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airflow areactivated.
X To deactivate: press the_ button.orX Press theI orK button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout.
Setting the temperatureYou can set the temperature separately for thedriver's and front-passenger sides with con-trols: orB (Y page 100).X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X Set control: orB (Y page 100) to thedesired temperature.Only change the temperature setting in smallincrements. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).
Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 112)in the ignition lock.
X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.
P Directs the airflow through the centervents
O Directs the airflow through the footwellair vents
S Directs the airflow through the centerand footwell vents
¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Canada only: directs the airflow through
the defroster and center ventsa Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents_ Canada only: directs the airflow through
the defroster, center and side air ventsand the footwell
Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X To increase: press theK button.X To reduce: press theI button.
i The airflow from the rear-compartmentvents and the center vents is the same.
Switching the ZONE function on/offX To switch on: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup.i The temperature setting for the driver's sideis not adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment. The temperaturefor the front-passenger side and the rear com-partment must be set separately.
X To switch off: press buttoná.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.i The temperature setting for the driver's sideis adopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.
Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost the wind-shield or to defrost the inside of the windshieldand the side windows.i You should only select the defrosting func-tion until the windshield is clear again.
Operating the climate control systems 105
Climatecontrol
Z
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 112)in the ignition lock.
X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rcooling with air dehumidification (only withengine running)Rhigh airflow (depending on the outside tem-perature)Rhigh temperature (depending on the out-side temperature)Rair distribution to the windshield and frontside windowsRair-recirculation mode off
X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. The cooling with air dehumidifica-tion function remains on. Air-recirculationmode remains deactivated.
orX Press theà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.
orX Turn controls: orB clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 100).
orX Press theK orI button.
Activating/deactivating MAX COOLmaximum coolingTheMAX COOL function is only available in vehi-cles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the engineis running.X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X To activate: press off-road buttonÙagain.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate controlswitches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate theÁ cooling with air dehumidi-fication function.
X Activate automatic modeÃ.X If thewindows continue to fog up, activate thedefrosting function (Y page 105).i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outsideX Switch on the windshield wipers (Y page 96).X Press the_ button repeatedly until theP orO symbol appears in the display.i You should only select this setting until thewindshield is clear again.
Switching the windshield defrosteron/off
G WARNINGAny accumulation of snow and ice should beremoved from the windshield before driving.Otherwise, your vision may be impaired,which could endanger you or others.
106 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol
X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X To switch on: press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up.
X To switch off: press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out.i At outside temperatures above 50‡ (10†)the windshield heating cannot be activated.Indicator lamp: lights up briefly when youattempt to activate it and then goes out again.
i The windshield defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the windshield is clear. Otherwise,the windshield heating switches itself offautomatically after 10 minutes.
i When the windshield heating is switched onfor the fourth time in a row, it switches itselfoff automatically after 5 minutes.
i Indicator lamp: flashes if too many elec-trical consumers are switched on at the sametime when the battery voltage is low. Afterapproximately 30 seconds the windshieldheating switches off automatically.
Switching the rear window defrosteron/off
Switching on/offX Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X Press theª button.The indicator lamp in theª button lightsup or goes out.i The rear window defroster has a high cur-rent draw. You should therefore switch it offas soon as the rear window is clear. as it only
switches off automatically after severalminutes.
i If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.
Problems with the rear windowdefrosterIf the indicator lamp in theª rear windowdefroster button flashes, the on-board voltage istoo low. The rear window defroster has deacti-vated prematurely or cannot be activated.X Switch off any consumers that are notrequired, e.g. reading lamps or interior light-ing.When the battery is sufficiently charged, therear window defroster is activated again auto-matically.
Activating/deactivating air-recircula-tion modeIf you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-dows can fog up more quickly, in particular atlow temperatures. Only use air-recirculationmode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-ging up.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X To activate: press thed button.The indicator lamp in thed button lightsup.i Air-recirculation mode is automatically acti-vated at high levels of pollution or at high out-side temperatures. When air-recirculationmode is activated automatically, the indicatorlamp in thed button is not lit.Outside air is added after approximately30 minutes.
Operating the climate control systems 107
Climatecontrol
Z
X To deactivate: press thed button.The indicator lamp in thed button goesout.i Air-recirculation mode switches off auto-matically:Rafter approximately five minutes at outsidetemperatures below approximately 41 ‡Rafter approximately five minutes if coolingwith air dehumidification is deactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at outsidetemperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †)
Convenience opening or closing usingthe air-recirculation button
G WARNINGWhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating, parts of the body could become trappedin the closing area of the side window and thesliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature is oper-ating. Make sure that no body parts are inclose proximity during the closing procedure.
G WARNINGDuring convenience opening parts of the bodycould be drawn in or become trappedbetween the side window and window frame.There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the side win-dow during the opening procedure. If some-one becomes trapped, immediately presstheW switch in the door to stop the move-ment of the sidewindows. To continue closingthe side window, pull on theW switch.
X Convenience closing feature: press andhold theg rocker switch up or down untilthe side windows and the sliding sunroof startto close automatically.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch lights up. Air-recirculation mode isactivated.If you manually open the side windows or thesliding sunroof after closing with the conve-
nience closing feature, they will remain in thisposition when opened.
If parts of the body are in the closing area duringconvenience closing, proceed as follows:X Press theW button to stop the side win-dows.The side window stops.
X To then open the side windows, press theW button again.
X Press the3 switch to stop the sliding sun-roof.The sliding sunroof stops.
X To then open the sliding sunroof, pull back onthe3 switch.
X Convenience opening feature: press andhold theg rocker switch up or down untilthe side windows and the sliding sunroof startto open automatically.The indicator lamp above theg rockerswitch goes out. Air-recirculation mode isdeactivated.
Activating/deactivating the residualheat functionThe "residual heat" function is only available inCanada.It is possible to make use of the residual heat ofthe engine to continue heating the stationaryvehicle for up to 30minutes after the engine hasbeen switched off. The heating time depends onthe coolant temperature and on the interior tem-perature that has been set.i The blowerwill run at a low speed regardlessof the airflow setting.
i If you activate the residual heat function athigh temperatures, only the ventilation will beactivated.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 0(Y page 112)in the ignition lock or remove it.
X To activate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button lightsup.
108 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol
X To deactivate: press theÁ button.The indicator lamp in theÁ button goesout.i Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage dropsRif the coolant temperature is too low
Setting the air vents
Important safety notes
G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the air out-lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.
General notesIn order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air intake grill on the hood free ofblockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles inthe vehicle interior.
i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust thesliders of the air vents to the center position.
i If the automatic climate control constantlydiffers from the set temperature or if unde-sired drafts are noticeable, proceed as fol-lows:X Open the side air ventsX Open the center air ventsX Open the rear air ventsX Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).The automatic climate control adjusts tothe set temperature.
Setting the center air vents
Center air vents: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheels= and?to the right or left.
Setting the side air vents
Side air vents: Side air vent; Swiveling side air vent= Control for side air ventX To open/close: turn thumbwheel= to theleft or right.
Setting the air vents 109
Climatecontrol
Z
Setting the rear-compartment airvents
X To open/close: turn thumbwheel: up ordown.
X To set the air direction: move slider; forthe corresponding rear-compartment air ventto the left, right, up or down.
110 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notesNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with its per-formance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying vehicleand engine speeds for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the tach-ometer needle isÔ of the way to the red areaof the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to brakethe vehicle.RTry to avoid depressing the accelerator pedalbeyond the point of resistance (kickdown).ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1when drivingslowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.
After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increasethe engine speed gradually and bring the vehicleto full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for AMG vehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
RChange gear in good time.RAvoid driving off-road before the differentialoil change at 2,000 miles (3,000 km).RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.
i You should also observe these breaking-innotes if the engine or parts of the drive trainon your vehicle have been replaced.
i Always observe the respective speed limits.
AMG vehicles with self-locking rearaxle differentialChange the oil after a breaking-in period of2,000miles (3,000 km) to improve protection ofthe differential. This oil change prolongs the ser-vice life of the differential. Have the oil changecarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for this pur-pose.
Driving
Important safety notes
G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.
G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.
Driving 111
Drivingandparking
Z
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.
G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.
! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use theengine's full performance until it has reachedoperating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission to thedesired drive position when the vehicle is sta-tionary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slippery roads.You could otherwise damage the drive train.
! Avoid high engine speeds when the engineis cold. The engine's service life could other-wise be significantly shortened. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.
! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil tempera-tures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), the maximumengine speed is restricted in order to protectthe engine. To protect the engine and main-tain smooth engine operation, avoid driving atfull throttle when the engine is cold.
SmartKey positions
g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such as
the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position3 To start the engineAs soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving, see(Y page 205).If the SmartKey is in position 0 in the ignitionlock for an extended period of time, it can nolonger be turned in the ignition lock. The steer-ing is then locked. To unlock, remove the Smart-Key and reinsert it into the ignition lock.The steering is locked when you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey when the engine isswitched off.The starter battery could otherwise be dis-charged.
If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignitionlock, the starter battery may not be chargedsufficiently.X Check the starter battery and charge it if nec-essary (Y page 252).
orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 254).
i You can only remove the SmartKey if:Rthe SmartKey is in position 0 in the ignitionlock.Rthe automatic transmission selector leveris in P.
112 DrivingDrivingandparking
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.
G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.
! Do not depress the accelerator when start-ing the engine.
Starting procedureX Shift the automatic transmission to posi-tion P.The transmission position display in the mul-tifunction display shows P.i For further information about the automatictransmission, see (Y page 118).
i If you depress the brake when starting theengine, pedal travel is unusually long andthere is less pedal resistance.
X Make sure that the parking brake is applied.X Turn the SmartKey to position 3 (Y page 112)in the ignition lock and release it as soon asthe engine is running.
i You can also use the touch-start function. Todo this, turn the SmartKey to position 3(Y page 112) and release it immediately. Theengine then starts automatically.
Pulling away
Automatic transmission
G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.
! Only shift the automatic transmission toreverse gear R or park position P when thevehicle is stationary. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be damaged.
! Do not depress the accelerator pedal whiledepressing the brake pedal. This impairsengine performance and results in prematurewear on the brake system and drivetrain.
! If a warning tone sounds and the ReleasePark. Brake message appears in the multi-function display, the parking brake is stillapplied. Release the parking brake.
X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.
X Shift the automatic transmission to positionDor R.i Before driving off, wait until the gear changeis fully completed.
X Release the parking brake (Y page 131).X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
i It is only possible to shift the automatictransmission from position P to a differentposition if you depress the brake pedal. Onlythen is the selector lever lock released.
i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside at anytime.You can also deactivate the automatic lockingfeature (Y page 180).
i Upshifts take place at higher engine speedsafter a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
Driving 113
Drivingandparking
Z
verter to reach its operating temperaturemore quickly.
Hill start assist
G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will no lon-ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for-wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holdsthe vehicle for a short time after you haveremoved your foot from the brake pedal. Thisgives you enough time to move your foot fromthe brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and todepress it before the vehicle begins to roll.X Take your foot off the brake pedal.i Once you have taken your foot off the brakepedal, the vehicle is held for around one sec-ond.
X Pull away.Hill start assist will not function if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on adownhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.
ECO start/stop function
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.
General notesThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehicle stopsmoving.The engine starts automatically when the driverwants to pull away again. The ECO start/stopfunction thereby helps you to reduce the fuelconsumption and emissions of your vehicle.The ECO start/stop function is activated eachtime the engine is switched on.The ECO start/stop function is only available indrive program C/E.The system is operational if all conditions forautomatic engine switch-off have been fulfilled(Y page 115) and theè symbol is shown ingreen in the multifunction display.In addition, the Stop/Start active messageis shown in the AMG menu in the multifunctiondisplay.If not all conditions for automatic engine switch-off are fulfilled (Y page 115), theè ECOsymbol is shown in yellow in the multifunctiondisplay.In addition, the Stop/Start inactive mes-sage is shown in the AMG menu in the multi-function display.If the ECO start/stop function has been man-ually deactivated (Y page 114) or a malfunctionhas caused the system to be deactivated, theè ECO symbol is not displayed.The Stop/Start active or Stop/Startinactive message in the AMG menu in themultifunction display goes out.
Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function
ECO button
114 DrivingDrivingandparking
X To deactivate: in drive program C/E pressbutton:.
orX Switch to drive program S orM (Y page 122).Indicator lamp; on button: and theèECO symbol in the multifunction display goout.The Stop/Start active or Stop/Startinactive message in the AMG menu in themultifunction display goes out.
X To activate: press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If drive program Sor M is active, the automatic transmissionswitches to drive program C/E.If all conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 115) are fulfilled, theè ECOsymbol is shown in green in the multifunctiondisplay. In addition, the Stop/Start activemessage is shown in the AMG menu in themultifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 115) are fulfilled, theèECO symbol is not shown. If this is the case,the ECO start/stop function is not available.In addition, the Stop/Start inactive dis-play message is shown in the AMG menu inthe multifunction display.
i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivated manuallyor as the result of a malfunction. The enginewill then not be switched off automaticallywhen the vehicle stops.
Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,the ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operational andtheè ECO symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in theè ECO button islit green.Rno off-road program has been selected.Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe outside temperature is within the comfortrange.Rthe engine is at normal operating tempera-ture.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.
Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is notfogged upwhen the air-conditioning system isswitched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.
If the conditions for automatic engine switch-offare not all fulfilled, theè ECO symbol isshown in yellow.In addition, the Stop/Start inactive mes-sage is shown in the AMG menu in the multi-function display.
i If you shift the transmission from R toD, theECO start/stop function is available againonce theè ECO symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.
i The engine can be automatically switchedoff an unlimited number of times.
i You can still activate the HOLD functionwhen the vehicle is stationary, even if theengine has been switched off automatically. Itis then not necessary to continue applying thebrakes during the automatic stop phase.When you depress the accelerator pedal, theengine starts automatically and the brakingeffect of the HOLD function is deactivated.Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, asthe engine must be started first.
i During automatic engine switch-off, the cli-mate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require full climatecontrol capacity, the ECO start/stop functioncan be deactivated by pressing the ECO but-ton (Y page 114).
Driving 115
Drivingandparking
Z
Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:RIn general:
- you switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button
- you release the brakes when in transmis-sion position D or N and when the HOLDfunction is not active.
RBy the driver:- you release the brakes when in transmis-sion position D or N
- you depress the accelerator pedal- you engage reverse gear R- you move the transmission out of positionP
- you switch to drive program S or M- you unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's door
RBy the system:- the vehicle starts to roll- the brake system requires this- the temperature in the vehicle interior devi-ates from the set range
- the system detects moisture on the wind-shield when the air-conditioning system isswitched on
- the battery's condition of charge is too low
i Shifting the transmission to position P doesnot start the engine.
116 DrivingDrivingandparking
Problems with the engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.
RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock beforeattempting to start the engine again.
X Try to start the engine again (Y page 113). Avoid excessively longand frequent attempts to start the engine, as this (Y page 112) willdrain the battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard. The yellowreserve fuel warninglamp is lit and the needleof the fuel gage displayshows 0.
The fuel tank is empty.X Refuel the vehicle.
The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak ordischarged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 254).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the startermotor to cool down for approximately twominutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine is not runningsmoothly and is misfir-ing.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converterand damage it.
X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Driving 117
Drivingandparking
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The coolant temperaturegage shows a valueabove 248 ‡ (120 †). Adisplay message mayalso appear in the multi-function display and awarning tonemay sound.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is nolonger being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant tocool down.
X Check the coolant level (Y page 238). Observe the warning notesas you do so and add coolant if necessary.
If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. The cool-ant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.
Adjustable damping
General notesWith the adjustable damping you can choosebetween two different suspension settings.Suspension settings
COMF Comfortable suspension setting
Sport Sports suspension setting
Selecting the suspension setting
Program selector button in the center console
i If you select the sports suspension setting,the vehicle will dampen more roughly.
X Press SPORT on program selector button:.The indicator lamp lights up. SPORT is shownin the multifunction display. The sports sus-pension setting is selected.
i If you select the comfortable suspensionsetting, the vehicle will dampen moresmoothly.
X Press COMF on program selector button:.The indicator lamp lights up. COMF is shownin the multifunction display. The comfortablesuspension setting is selected.
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D or R,the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There isa risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.
G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.
118 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking
i Bear in mind that the power transmissionbetween the engine and the transmission isinterrupted when the engine is switched off.For this reason, shift the automatic transmis-sion to P when the engine is switched off andthe vehicle is at a standstill. Apply the parkingbrake to prevent the vehicle from rollingaway.
Selector lever
Overview of transmission positions! If the engine speed is too high or if the vehi-cle is rolling, do not shift the transmissiondirectly from D to R, from R to D or directly toP.Do not open the driver's door while the vehi-cle is inmotion. At low speeds in transmissionposition D or R, park position P is otherwiseengaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.
Selector leverj Park positionk Reverse geari Neutralh DriveWhen you select a transmission position, theselector lever subsequently returns to its origi-nal position.The current transmission position P, R, N or Dappears in the transmission position display inthe multifunction display.
Transmission position and drive pro-gram display! If the transmission position display in themultifunction display is not working, you
should pull away carefully to check whetherthe desired transmission position is engaged.Select transmission position D. Do notrestrict the shift range.
: Transmission position; Drive programCurrent transmission position: and currentdrive program; appear in the multifunctiondisplay.The current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicators goout when the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock.When the selector lever is in position D, you caninfluence the gearshifts made by the automatictransmission by:Rrestricting the shift rangeRchanging gear yourself
Engaging park position PX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.
X Press the P button in the center console.
i If you depress the brake pedal and push theselector lever forwards or back to the firstpoint of resistance, park position P is disen-gaged. The transmission shifts to neutral N.
Automatic transmission 119
Drivingandparking
Z
Park position P is automatically engaged:Rif you remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlockRif you open the driver's door while traveling atlow speed in transmission position D or RRif DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 147) brakes yourvehicle until it is stationary and at least one ofthe following conditions is fulfilled:- the engine is switched off.- the driver's door is open and the seat belt isnot fastened.
- there is a system malfunction.- the power supply is insufficient.
Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.
X Push the selector lever forwards past the firstpoint of resistance.Transmission position R is engaged.
i When reverse gear is engaged and the ECOstart/stop function is switched on, the enginestarts up automatically (Y page 114).
Shifting to neutral N
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.
If the vehicle is stationary:X Depress the brake pedal.X Depending on the current transmission posi-tion, press the selector lever forwards orbackwards to the first point of resistance.The automatic transmission shifts into N.
If the engine has been switched off, the auto-matic transmission automatically shifts to N.
i If the vehicle is braked to a standstill when inneutralN and the brake pedal continues to bedepressed, the ECO start/stop functionswitches the engine off automatically(Y page 114).
Remaining in neutral N
G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.
X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.
X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.
120 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking
X If the parking brake is applied, release it.X Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKeyin the ignition lock.
Shifting to transmission position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.
X Push the selector lever back past the firstpoint of resistance.Transmission position D is engaged.
i If the vehicle is braked to a standstill when intransmission position D (Y page 114) and thebrake pedal continues to be depressed, theECO start/stop function switches the engineoff automatically.
Transmission positions
B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P (Y page 119) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parking lockshould not be used as a brake whenparking. In addition to engaging theparking lock, you must always applythe parking brake to secure the vehi-cle.
i The SmartKey can only beremoved if the transmission is inposition P. When there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock, theselector lever is locked in positionP.
C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission toRwhenthe vehicle is stationary.
A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow you tomove the vehicle freely, e.g. to pushit or tow it.Do not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, the auto-matic transmission could be dam-aged.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: onlyshift the transmission to positionN ifthe vehicle is in danger of skidding,e.g. on icy roads.If you want to engage the transfercase, shift briefly into N(Y page 162).
! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.
7 DriveThe automatic transmission changesgear automatically. All forward gearsare available.
Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to the indi-vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-mission position D. This automatic gearshiftingbehavior is determined by:Ra shift range restriction, if selectedRthe position of the transfer case (HIGHRANGE or LOW RANGE)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed
Driving tips
Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how the auto-matic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts
Automatic transmission 121
Drivingandparking
Z
KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to a lowergear depending on the engine speed.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Kickdown is not available in the permanentman-ual drive program on AMG vehicles.
Rocking the vehicle freeShifting the transmission repeatedly betweengears D and R may help to free the vehicle if ithas become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi-cle's engine management system limits thespeed to a maximum of 5 mph (9 km/h) whenshifting back and forth. To shift back and forthbetween transmission positions D and R, movethe selector lever forwards and backwards pastthe point of resistance.
Towing a trailerX Drive in the middle of the engine speed rangeon uphill gradients.
X Vehicles except AMG vehicles: shift downto shift range3 or2 depending on the uphill ordownhill gradient (Y page 123), even if cruisecontrol or SPEEDTRONIC is activated.AMG vehicles: shift down to gear 3 or 2depending on the uphill or downhill gradient(Y page 123), even if cruise control,DISTRONIC PLUS or SPEEDTRONIC is activa-ted.
X Shift the transfer case into low-range drivingposition LOW RANGE on extreme uphill gra-dients or steep downhill gradients(Y page 162).
Program selector button
General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between drive programs with differentdriving characteristics.
i In AMG vehicles, drive program E is calleddrive program C.
i The automatic transmission switches toautomatic drive programE (drive programC inAMG vehicles) each time the engine is star-ted.
i Only change from automatic drive programC or S to manual drive program M when thevehicle is stationary.
Drive program except for AMG vehicles
E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gear shifting
Drive programs on AMG vehicles
C ControlledEfficiency
Comfortable, economicaldriving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gear shifting
i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 123).
122 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking
Selecting the drive program
Program selector button (except for AMG vehicles)
Program selector button (AMG vehicles)X Press program selector button: repeatedlyuntil the letter for the desired gearshift pro-gram appears in the multifunction display.
Steering wheel paddle shifters
In the automatic drive program, you can restrictor derestrict the shift range by using steeringwheel paddle shifters: and; (Y page 123).In the manual drive program you can changegears manually using steering wheel paddleshifters: and; (Y page 124).
i You can only change gear with the steeringwheel paddle shifters when the transmissionis in position D.
Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on AMG vehi-cles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmissionsettingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting from theautomatic transmission shifting up soonerRthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless the accel-erator pedal is depressed fullyRincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, for exam-pleRthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle being drivenat lower engine speeds and the wheels beingless likely to spin
Drive program S is characterized by the follow-ing:Rsporty engine and transmission settingsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting up laterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higher asa result of the later automatic transmissionshift points
Shift ranges
IntroductionWhen the automatic transmission is in positionD, it is possible to restrict or derestrict the shiftrange.The shift range selected is shown in the multi-function display. The automatic transmissionshifts only as far as the selected gear.Setting the shift range is not possible on AMGvehicles.
Automatic transmission 123
Drivingandparking
Z
Driving situations
= You can use the engine's brakingeffect
5 The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized on downhill gradients orwhen driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions
4 The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized on extremely steep down-hill gradients and long downhillstretches.
Restricting the shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 123).The automatic transmission shifts down onegear and restricts the shift range to the rele-vant gear.
i If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.
i If the maximum engine speed for the shiftrange is reached and you continue to accel-erate, the automatic transmission shifts up inorder to prevent the engine from overrevving,even if the shift range is restricted.
Derestricting the shift rangeX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 123).The automatic transmission shifts up onegear and restricts the shift range to the rele-vant gear.
Clearing the shift range restrictionX Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheelpaddle shifter (Y page 123) until D is shownagain in the multifunction display.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.
Selecting the ideal shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 123) and hold it in position.The automatic transmission shifts to the gearwhich allows optimum acceleration anddeceleration. To do this, the automatic trans-mission shifts down one or more gears.
i The automatic transmission cannot shiftdown beyond second gear. To shift to firstgear, you have to pull the left steering wheelpaddle shifter.
Manual gear shifting
Temporary setting
X To activate: shift the DIRECT SELECT lever toposition D.
X Pull steering wheel paddle shifter: or;.Temporary setting will be active for a certainamount of time. Under certain conditions theminimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in thecase of lateral acceleration, during an overrunphase or when driving on steep terrain.X To deactivate: pull steering wheel paddleshifter; and hold it in place.
orX Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch thetransmission position.
orX Use the DYNAMIC SELECT switch to changethe drive program.
Shifting gears! The automatic transmission does not shiftup automatically even when the engine limit-ing speed for the current gear is reached.
124 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking
When the engine limiting speed is reached,the fuel supply is cut to prevent the enginefrom overrevving. Always make sure that theengine speed does not reach the red area ofthe tachometer. There is otherwise a risk ofengine damage.
X To shift up: pull steering wheel paddleshifter;.The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.
X To shift down: pull steering wheel paddleshifter:.The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-ing.If the engine exceeds the maximum enginespeed when shifting down, the automatictransmission protects against engine damageby not shifting down.
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. The rec-ommended gear is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.X If relevant gearshift recommendation:appears in the multifunction display on theinstrument cluster, pull the correspondingsteering wheel paddle shifter (Y page 123).The automatic transmission shifts to recom-mended gear;.
X If relevant gearshift recommendation:appears in the multifunction display in theinstrument cluster, pull the correspondingsteering wheel paddle shifter (see the DigitalOperator's Manual).The automatic transmission shifts to recom-mended gear;.
Manual drive program
General informationIn manual drive program M, you can perma-nently change gear yourself by using the steer-ing wheel paddle shifters. The transmissionmust be in position D. The gear currently selec-ted and engaged is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.Manual drive program M differs from drive pro-grams E and S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.
Switching on the manual drive programX Shift the transmission to position D.X Press the program selector button repeatedlyuntil M appears in the multifunction display.
Upshifting! In manual drive program M, the automatictransmission does not shift up automaticallyeven when the engine limiting speed for thecurrent gear is reached. When the engine lim-iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut toprevent the engine from overrevving. Alwaysmake sure that the engine speed does notreach the red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.
Automatic transmission 125
Drivingandparking
Z
X If corresponding gearshift recommenda-tion: appears in the multifunction displayon the instrument cluster, pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter(Y page 123).The automatic transmission shifts to recom-mended gear;.
DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 123).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.
i If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmission automati-cally shifts down.
Selecting the optimal gear for maxi-mum accelerationX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter until the transmission selects the opti-mum gear according to the speed.
Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button repeatedlyuntil C or S appears in the multifunction dis-play.
126 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking
Problems with the automatic transmission
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission no lon-ger changes gear.
The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.
You hear a warning tone. You have:Rswitched off the engineRopened the driver's doorRnot shifted the selector lever to position PX Shift the selector lever to position P.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.
G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.
! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel result in damage to the fuel systemand engine.
! Do not switch on the ignition if you acciden-tally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, thefuel will enter the fuel lines. Notify a qualifiedspecialist workshop and have the fuel tankand fuel lines drained completely.
Refueling 127
Drivingandparking
Z
! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.
! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.
! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection sys-tem could be blocked by particles from thefuel can.
If you overfill the fuel tank, pressure may buildup in the fuel tank. This could cause fuel to sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.There is a risk of injury. The fuel tank is full whenthe fuel pump nozzle first switches off. End therefueling process.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 289).
Refueling
Vehicles with a fuel filler flap
Example: G 550 fuel filler cap: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= Fuel type? To insert the fuel filler capWhen you open or close the vehicle with theSmartKey, the fuel filler flap is automaticallyunlocked or locked.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow nextto the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-cle. The fuel filler flap is located to the rear onthe right.
Opening the fuel filler cap
: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= Fuel type? To insert the fuel filler capX Switch the engine off.i When the engine is running and the fuel fillerflap is open, the yellow reserve fuel warninglamp and the= (USA only) or; (Can-ada only) Check Engine warning lamp maylight up.Further information about warning and indi-cator lamps in the instrument cluster can befound in the Digital Operator's Manual.
X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise andremove it.
X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap?.
RefuelingX Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank and refuel.
i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuelmay leak out.
ClosingX Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it clock-wise. The fuel filler cap audibly engages.
X Close the fuel filler flap.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle. A locking pin otherwise prevents thefuel filler flap from closing after the vehiclehas been locked.
128 RefuelingDrivingandparking
Fuel filler flap emergency release
The emergency release is located in the cargocompartment, on the right-hand side whenviewed in the direction of travel, behind the rearpanel trim.i The vehicle body in the emergency releasearea has sharp edges. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the edges on the inside ofthe vehicle body.
X Open the rear door.X Remove edge protection:.X Remove rear panel trim;.
X Pull emergency release= in the direction ofthe arrow.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Open the fuel filler flap.
Refueling 129
Drivingandparking
Z
Problems with the fuel and fuel tank
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.
G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 112) immediately andremove it.
X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap cannotbe opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey batteries are discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 60).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 61).X Open the rear door.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release(Y page 129).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release(Y page 129).
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-cle which are hot. Take particular care not topark on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.
G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.
130 ParkingDrivingandparking
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches to neu-tral positionNwhen you switch off the engine.The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of anaccident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking positionP. Prevent the parked vehi-cle from rolling away by applying the parkingbrake.
Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock and remove it (Y page 112).The immobilizer is activated.
X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Turn the steering wheel until the steeringwheel lock engages.
i If you switch off the engine using the Smart-Key and then remove the SmartKey from theignition lock or open one of the front doors,the automatic transmission automaticallyshifts to park position P.
i The SmartKey can only be removed if theautomatic transmission is in position P.
Parking brake
G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.
G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-cle, they could set it inmotion by, for example:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of theparking position P.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-ment and become trapped. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
i When you apply parking brake; to brakethe vehicle, the brake lamps do not light up.
X To apply: pull parking brake; up firmly.Parking brake; is applied.When the ignition is switched on or the engineis running, theF (USA only) orJ (Can-ada only) indicator lamp is lit in the instrumentcluster.
Parking 131
Drivingandparking
Z
X To release: depress the brake pedal and keepit depressed.The selector lever lock is released.
X Pull parking brake; up firmly.X Press release button: on parking brake;and move parking brake; down to the stop.When the ignition is switched on or the engineis running, theF (USA only) or! (Can-ada only) indicator lampgoes out in the instru-ment cluster.
i If you pull away with parking brake;applied, a warning tone sounds.
Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharge.X Connect a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialist work-shop.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than sixweeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as aresult of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seekadvice.
Driving tips
General driving tips
Important safety notes
G WARNINGAlways remember that you must concentrateprimarily on driving the vehicle. The driver'sconcentration must always be directed pri-marily at road traffic. For your own safety andthat of others, we recommend that you stopthe vehicle at a safe place and in accordancewith the traffic conditions before making oraccepting a phone call.Comply with all legal requirements if you usethe telephone while driving. Use the hands-free system and only use the telephone whenroad, weather and traffic conditions permit. In
some jurisdictions, it is forbidden for driversto use mobile phones while driving.Only operateCOMAND (CockpitManagementand Data System) in compliance with all legalrequirements andwhen the road, weather andtraffic conditions permit. You may otherwisenot be able to observe the traffic conditions,endangering yourself and others.Remember that your vehicle covers a distanceof 44 ft (approximately 14 m) a second whenit is traveling at only 30 mph (approximately50 km/h).
G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the rec-ommended tire pressure.
X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof carriers when they are not nee-ded.
X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work performed at theservice intervals specified in theMaintenanceBooklet or indicated by the service intervalindicator.
Fuel consumption also increaseswhen driving incold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-rain.
Drinking and driving
G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
132 Driving tipsDrivingandparking
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-ment.The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-dent are greatly increased when you drink ortake drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-ing drugs.
Pedals
G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicle isjeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.
Emission control
G WARNINGInhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbon mon-oxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause uncon-sciousness and possible death.Do not run the engine in confined areas (suchas a garage) which are not properly ventilated.If you think that exhaust gas fumes are enter-ing the vehicle while driving, have the causedetermined and corrected immediately. If youmust drive under these conditions, drive onlywith at least one window fully open at alltimes.
Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance with themanufacturer's specifications. For this reason,all work on the engine should only be carried out
by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benztechnicians.The engine settings must not be changed underany circumstances. Furthermore, all specificservice work must be carried out at regularintervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.
Braking
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface, the wheelsmay lose traction:Rif you remove your foot from the accelera-tor pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increased dan-ger of skidding and accidents.Never activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shifting earlyto a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessive wearof the brakes.When you take advantage of the engine brak-ing effect, a drivewheelmay not turn for sometime, e.g. on a slippery road surface. Thiscould cause damage to the drive train. Thistype of damage is not covered by theMercedes-Benz warranty.
Heavy and light loads
G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.
Driving tips 133
Drivingandparking
Z
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows the airflowto cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roadsIf driving in heavy rain for a prolonged period oftime without braking, there may be a delayedreaction from the brakes when braking for thefirst time. This may also occur after the vehiclehas been washed.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having the vehiclewashed, brake firmly while paying attention tothe traffic conditions. This will warm up thebrake discs, thereby drying them more quicklyand protecting them against corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-due may form on the brake discs and brakepads. This can result in a significantly longerbraking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.
Servicing the brakes! If the brake warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster and you hear a warningtone even though the parking brake has beenreleased, the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages in themultifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked immediately.This work should be carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a 2-axle dynamometer. Ifyou are planning to have the vehicle tested onsuch a dynamometer, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to obtain further infor-mation first. Otherwise, you could damagethe drive train or the brake system.
! As the ESP® system operates automatically,the engine and the ignition must be switchedoff (the SmartKeymust be in position 0 or 1 inthe ignition lock) if the parking brake is testedon a brake dynamometer (for a maximum often seconds).Braking applications triggered automaticallyby ESP® may otherwise seriously damage thebrake system.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only havebrake pads/linings installed on your vehiclewhich have been approved for Mercedes-Benzvehicles or which correspond to an equivalentquality standard. Brake pads/liningswhich havenot been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehiclesor which are not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only usebrake fluid that has been specially approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corre-sponds to an equivalent quality standard. Brakefluid which has not been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which is not of anequivalent quality could affect your vehicle'soperating safety.All checks and maintenance work on the brakesystem must be carried out at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If your brake system is subject only to moderateloads, you should test the functionality of yourbrakes at regular intervals by pressing firmly onthe brake pedal at high speeds. This improvesthe grip of the brake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)on (Y page 56).
134 Driving tipsDrivingandparking
High-performance brake system forAMG vehiclesThe high-performance brake system is onlyinstalled on the G 63 AMG and the G 65 AMG.The high-performance brake system is designedfor heavy loads. This may lead to noise whenbraking. This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as tempera-ture and humidity
The wear of individual components of the brakesystem, such as the brake pads/linings or brakediscs, depends on the individual driving styleand operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-age that will be valid under all circumstances. Anaggressive driving style will lead to high wear.You can obtain further information about thisfrom your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect after severalhundred kilometers of driving. Compensate forthis by applying greater force to the brake pedal.Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving andbraking accordingly during this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-ingly high brakewear. Observe the brake systemwarning lamp in the instrument cluster and noteany brake status messages in the multifunctiondisplay. For high-performance driving in partic-ular, it is important to maintain and have thebrake system checked regularly.
Parking brake
G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-cle when the service brake is faulty. Do notapply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.
If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake,the brake lamps will not light up.
If you drive on wet roads or dirt-covered surfa-ces, road salt and/or dirt could get into theparking brake.In order to prevent corrosion and a reduction inthe braking power of the parking brake, observethe following:Rpull the parking brake upwards with therelease button depressed from time to timebefore beginning the journey (Y page 131).Rdrive for approximately 110 yds (100 m) at amaximum speed of 12 mph (20 km/h)
Driving on wet roads
HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depth onthe road surface, there is a danger of hydro-planing occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or inconditions in which hydroplaning may occur,you must drive in the following manner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.
Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas. Checkthe depth of any water before driving throughit. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-erwise, watermay enter the vehicle interior orthe engine compartment. This can damagethe electronic components in the engine orthe automatic transmission. Water can alsobe drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzlesand this can cause engine damage.
If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhichwater has collected, please bear in mind that:Rthe maximum permissible still water depthdepends on the vehicle equipmentRyou should drive no faster than at a walkingpace
Off-road fording! Under no circumstances should you accel-erate before entering the water. The bow
Driving tips 135
Drivingandparking
Z
wave could cause water to enter and damagethe engine and other assemblies.
! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors whilefording. Otherwise, water could get into thevehicle interior and damage the vehicle'selectronics and interior equipment.
i You may only drive through fresh water.RObserve the safety notes (Y page 137) andthe general notes (Y page 137) on off-roaddriving.REstablish how deep the water is and the char-acteristics of the body of water before ford-ing.RSwitch off the air-conditioning system.RShift the transfer case to LOW RANGE(Y page 162).REngage the differential locks, if necessary(Y page 165).RRestrict the shift range to 1 or 2(Y page 123).RAvoid high engine speeds.REnter and exit the water at a flat place and ata steady walking pace.RDrive slowly and at an even speed through thewater.RDo not stop and do not switch off the engine.RWater offers a high degree of resistance, andthe ground is slippery and in some casesunstable. Therefore, it is difficult and danger-ous to pull away in the water.REnsure that a bow wave does not form as youdrive.RClean any mud from the tire tread after ford-ing.RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.Always observe the fording depth values(Y page 296).
Winter driving
General notes
G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open awindow on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.
G WARNINGIf you have installed unsuitable snowchains tothe front wheels, they may drag against thevehicle body or chassis components. Thiscould cause damage to the vehicle or thetires. There is a risk of an accident.Only equip the front wheels with suitablesnow chains that guarantee sufficient dis-tance to the vehicle body and to the suspen-sion components in every driving situation.Always follow the manufacturer's installationinstructions when installing the snow chains.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 264).
Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-tion (Y page 264).
Slippery road surfaces
G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional engine brak-ing on a slippery road surface.
136 Driving tipsDrivingandparking
G WARNINGIf you activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface, the wheelsmay lose traction:Rif you remove your foot from the accelera-tor pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increased dan-ger of skidding and accidents.Never activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering andbraking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.X Try to bring the vehicle under control usingcorrective steering.
The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning device andis therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.Indicated temperatures just above the freezingpoint do not guarantee that the road surface isfree of ice. The roadmay still be icy, especially inwooded areas or on bridges. You should payspecial attention to road conditions when tem-peratures are around the freezing point.For more information on driving with snowchains, see (Y page 264).
Off-road driving
Important safety notes
G WARNINGDo not load items on the basic carrier bars. Itmay cause instability during somemaneuverswhich could result in an accident.Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This willmake it easier to recognize unexpected obsta-cles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, neverturn it around on steep inclines. If the vehiclecannot complete the attempted climb, back itdown in reverse gear.Do not drive along the side of a slope. Thevehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing sothe vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll,immediately steer into a line of gravity(straight up or downhill).Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.You may lose control of the vehicle if you useonly the service brake. For information ondriving downhill, see "Driving downhill".
When driving off-road, sand, mud and water,possibly mixed with oil, for example, could getinto the brakes. This could result in a reducedbraking effect or in total brake failure and also inincreased wear and tear. The braking charac-teristics change depending on the materialingressing the brakes. Clean the brakes afterdriving off-road. If you detect a reduced brakingeffect or grinding noises, have the brake systemchecked in a qualified specialist workshop assoon as possible. Adapt your driving style to thedifferent braking characteristics.Driving off-road increases the likelihood of dam-age to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead tofailure of the mechanical assembly or systems.Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain con-ditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to thevehicle rectified immediately at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
General notes
H Environmental noteProtection of the environment is of primaryimportance. Treat nature with respect.Observe all prohibiting signs.
Read this section carefully before driving yourvehicle off-road. Practice by driving over moregentle off-road terrain first.Familiarize yourself with the characteristics ofyour vehicle and the gear shift operation beforedriving through difficult terrain.
Driving tips 137
Drivingandparking
Z
The following driving systems are speciallyadapted to off-road driving:R4ETS (Y page 57)RTransfer case (Y page 162)RDifferential locks (Y page 162)Observe the following notes:Rstop your vehicle and, if necessary, shift thetransfer case to LOW RANGE (Y page 162)before driving off-road.Rin transfer case position LOW RANGE theECO start/stop function is not available(Y page 114).Rengage the differential locks, if necessary(Y page 165).
i ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivatedwhile the differential locks are engaged. Thisallows the front wheels to lock briefly, so thatthese can dig into a loose surface. However,please note that locked wheels skid and canno longer steer.RCheck that items of luggage and loads arestowed safely and are well secured(Y page 219).RTo avoid damaging the vehicle, make surethere is always sufficient ground clearance.RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on a downhill gradient.RAlways keep the engine running and in gearwhen driving on a slope.RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at awalking pace.REnsure that the wheels are in contact with theground at all times.RDrivewith extreme care on unfamiliar off-roadroutes where visibility is poor. For safety rea-sons, get out of the vehicle first and surveythe off-road route.RCheck the depth ofwater before fording riversand streams.RWhen fording, do not stop and do not switchoff the engine.RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks, holes,tree stumps and furrows.RAlways keep the doors, rear door, side win-dows and the sliding sunroof closed while thevehicle is in motion.RSwitch off cruise control.RDo not stray from marked routes or paths.
RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The rougher,steeper ormore ruts on the terrain, the sloweryour speed should be.RDrive slowly and at an even speed through thewater. Ensure that a bow wave does not formas you drive.ROn sand, drive quickly to overcome the rollingresistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheelscould become stuck in loose ground.RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will inter-rupt the vehicle's propulsion.RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropri-ate engine speeds (maximum 3,000 rpm).RDo not shift the automatic transmission totransmission position N.RAlways check the vehicle for damage after off-road driving.
i Information about retrofitting special all-ter-rain tires is available from any qualified spe-cialist workshop.
i Do not use the HOLD function when drivingoff-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradientsor on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLDfunction cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-faces.
Checklist before driving off-road! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up whilethe vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle in asafe place as soon as possible. Check theengine oil level. The engine oil warning lampwarning must not be ignored. Continuing thejourney while the symbol is displayed couldlead to engine damage.
X Oil level: check the engine oil level and add oilif necessary.Only then does the engine receive enough oilwhen the vehicle is on a steep incline.
X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jack isworking and make sure you have the lugwrench, a robust tow cable and a foldingspade in the vehicle.
X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread depthand tire pressure.
X Check for damage and remove any foreignobjects, e.g. small stones, from the wheels/tires.
X Replace any missing valve caps.
138 Driving tipsDrivingandparking
X Replace dented or damaged wheels.X Carry a sound spare wheel.
Checklist after driving off-roadDriving over rough terrain places greaterdemands on your vehicle than driving on normalroads. After driving off-road, check the vehicle.This allows you to detect damage promptly andreduce the risk of an accident to yourself andother road users.X Shift the transfer case to HIGHRANGE(Y page 162).
X Disengage the differential locks(Y page 166).
X Clean the headlamps and rear lights andcheck for damage.
X Clean the front and rear license plates.X Clean the wheels and tires with a water jetand remove any foreign objects.
X Clean the wheels, tires, wheel housings andthe vehicle underside with a water jet; checkfor any foreign objects and damage.
X Check whether twigs or other parts of plantshave become trapped. These increase the riskof fire and can damage fuel pipes, brakehoses or the rubber bellows of the axle jointsand propeller shafts.
X After the trip, examine without fail the entireundercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, body-work structure, steering, chassis and exhaustsystem for damage.
X After driving for extended periods acrosssand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirtyconditions, have the brake discs, wheels,brake pads/linings and axle joints checkedand cleaned.
X If you notice strong vibrations after off-roaddriving, check for foreign objects in thewheels and drive train and, if necessary,remove them.Foreign objects can disturb the balance andcause vibrations.
X Test the brakes.
Driving on sandObserve the following rules when driving onsand:RShift the transfer case to LOWRANGE(Y page 162).RAvoid high engine speeds.RLimit the shift range of the automatic trans-mission according to the off-road conditions.RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling resist-ance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels couldbecome stuck in loose ground.RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if possi-ble. When doing so, make sure that:- the tire ruts are not too deep.- the sand is sufficiently firm.- your vehicle has sufficient ground clear-ance
Tire ruts and gravel roads! Check that the ruts are not too deep andthat your vehicle has sufficient clearance.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged orbottom out and get stuck.
Observe the following rules when driving alongruts in off-road terrain or on roads with loosegravel:RShift the transfer case to LOWRANGE(Y page 162).RAvoid high engine speeds.RObserve the safety notes (Y page 137) andthe general notes (Y page 137) on off-roaddriving.RRestrict the shift range of the automatictransmission to 1(Y page 123).RDrive slowly.RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with thewheels of one side on the center grassy area,if possible.
Driving over obstacles! Obstacles could damage the floor of thevehicle or components of the chassis. Askpassengers for guidance when driving overlarge obstacles. The passenger should alwayskeep a safe distance from the vehicle whendoing so in order to avoid injury as a result ofunexpected vehicle movements. After drivingoff-road or over obstacles, check the vehicle
Driving tips 139
Drivingandparking
Z
for possible damage, especially to the under-body and the components of the chassis.
! Drive with particular care when driving overan obstacle while driving up or down a steepslope.The vehicle could otherwise tilt and slide side-ways or tip over.
Observe the following rules when driving overtree stumps, large stones and other obstacles:RObserve the safety notes (Y page 137) andthe general notes (Y page 137) on off-roaddriving.RShift the transfer case to LOW RANGE(Y page 162).RAvoid high engine speeds.RRestrict the shift range to 1 (Y page 123).RMake sure that you have enough groundclearance before driving across an obstacle.RDrive very slowly.RTry to drive straight over the center of obsta-cles: front wheel first, then rear wheel.
Traveling uphill
Approach/departure angle
G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.
Always observe the approach/departure anglevalues (Y page 296).RObserve the safety notes (Y page 137) andthe general notes (Y page 137) on off-roaddriving.RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines orgradients, but instead follow the direct line offall. Note that the climbing ability of your vehi-cle depends on the terrain conditions.RBefore driving on extreme uphill and downhillgradients, shift the transfer case to LOWRANGE (Y page 162).REngage the differential locks, if necessary(Y page 165).
RDrive slowly.RAccelerate gently and make sure that thewheels are gripping.RAvoid high engine speeds, except when driv-ing on sandy andmuddy routes with high driv-ing resistance.RAvoid high engine speeds – drive at an appro-priate engine speed (maximum 3,000 rpm).RWhen driving down an incline,make use of theengine's braking effect. Observe the enginespeed; do not overrev the engine.
i Further information on themaximumenginespeed: (Y page 171).RSelect a shift range appropriate to the gradi-ent.RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,select shift range 1 (Y page 123).RAlways check the brakes after driving off-road.
i Hill start assist will aid you when pullingaway on a hill.For more information, see "Hill start assist"(Y page 114).
Maximum gradient-climbing capabilityAlways observe the maximum gradient climbingability values (Y page 297).
HilltopsWhen driving on an uphill gradient, reduce pres-sure slightly on the accelerator immediatelybefore reaching the top of the hill (do not shiftthe transmission to position N). Use the vehi-cle's own impetus to drive over the top of thehill.This style of driving prevents:Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on thebrow of a hillRloss of tractionRthe vehicle from traveling too quickly downthe other side
Driving downhillRBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,select shift range 1(Y page 123).This way you use the engine's braking effectto reduce the speed. If this is not sufficient,brake gently. When doing so, make sure that
140 Driving tipsDrivingandparking
the vehicle is facing in the direction of the lineof fall.RObserve the notes on driving in mountainousterrain (Y page 140).RDrive slowly.RDo not drive at an angle down steep inclines.Steer into the line of fall and drive with thefront wheels aligned straight. Otherwise, thevehicle could slip sideways, tip and roll over.RCheck that the brakes are working normallyafter a long downhill stretch.
i The special off-road ABS setting (Y page 56)enables repeated, brief, precise locking of thefront wheels, which leads to the wheels dig-ging into the loose ground. Note that whenthe front wheels are fully braked, they slideeasily over the surface of the ground, makingit difficult to steer.
Driving systems
Cruise control
Important safety notes
G WARNINGThe brake pedal moves when cruise controlbrakes the vehicle. A foot in the area underthe brake pedal could become trapped. Themovement of the pedal, and therefore thevehicle's ability to brake, may be restricted byobjects in the area under the brake. There is arisk of an accident and injury.Do not place your foot under the brake pedal.Keep the area under the brake pedal free fromobstructions.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-trol can neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. Cruise control can-not take account of road, weather and trafficconditions. Cruise control is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking in goodtime. Adjust your driving style to the traffic con-ditions. Only engage cruise control when thecurrent road, weather and traffic conditions per-mit it to be done safely. Drive carefully andmaintain a suitable distance to the vehicle infront.
Do not use cruise control:Rin traffic conditions that do not allow you todrive at a constant speed, e.g. heavy traffic,on winding roads or off-roadRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-erating could cause the drive wheels to losetraction and the vehicle could then skidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow
General notesCruise control maintains a constant road speedfor you. On long and steep downhill gradients,especially if the vehicle is laden, youmust selectshift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so,you will make use of the braking effect of theengine. This relieves the load on the brake sys-tem and prevents the brakes from overheatingand wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steadyspeed for a prolonged period. You can store anyroad speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
i Cruise control should not be activated whendriving off-road.
Cruise control lever
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlYou can operate cruise control and variableSPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.
Driving systems 141
Drivingandparking
Z
When you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction display forfive seconds.The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selected:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control isselected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-TRONIC is selected.
Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe parking brake must be released.Ryou are driving faster than 20mph (30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Selecting cruise control
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Check whether LIM indicator lamp; is off.If it is off, cruise control is already selected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrowA.LIM indicator lamp; in the cruise controllever goes out. Cruise control is selected.
Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed
Storing and maintaining the currentspeed
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlYou can store the current speed if you are driv-ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-matically maintains the stored speed.
i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill and downhill gra-dients. The stored speed is resumedwhen thegradient levels out. Cruise control maintainsthe stored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.
Calling up the stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle deceler-ates. If you do not know the stored speed, thevehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. Thereis a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
142 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Cruise control is activated and adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored.
i If no speed is stored, cruise control storesthe current speed and maintains it.
Setting a speed
Adjusting
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed
? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle accelerates or decelerates tothe set speed.X To increase the speed: press the cruise con-trol lever up:.
X To decrease the speed: press the cruisecontrol lever down?.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until thedesired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored.
Making adjustments in 1mph increments(1 km/h increments in Canada)
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Briefly press the cruise control lever up: fora higher speed or down? for a lower speed.The last speed stored is increased or reduced.
orX Keep the cruise control lever pressed until thedesired speed is reached. Press the cruisecontrol lever up: for a higher speed ordown? for a lower speed.
Driving systems 143
Drivingandparking
Z
Making adjustments in 5mph increments(10 km/h increments):
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown? to beyond the pressure point.The last speed stored is increased or reduced.
orX Keep the cruise control lever pressed until thedesired speed is reached. Press the cruisecontrol lever up: for a higher speed ordown? for a lower speed.
i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. For example, ifyou accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finished overtak-ing.
Deactivating cruise control
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruise con-trol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwardsB.
orX Brake.orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrowA.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indi-cator lamp; in the cruise control lever lightsup.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou apply the parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20mph (30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ryou shift the transmission to position N whiledriving
i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.
144 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
SPEEDTRONIC
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.
! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED-TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of accidentnor override the laws of physics. SPEEDTRONICcannot take account of road, weather and trafficconditions. SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. Youare responsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good timeand for staying in lane. Only engage SPEED-TRONIC when the current road, weather andtraffic conditions permit it to be done safely.Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distanceto the vehicle in front.
General notesSPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so that youdo not exceed the set speed. On long and steepdownhill gradients, especially if the vehicle isladen or towing a trailer, you must select shiftrange1,2 or3 in good time. By doing so, youwillmake use of the braking effect of the engine,which relieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating and wear-ing too quickly. If you need additional braking,depress the brake pedal repeatedly rather thancontinuously.
i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the limit speed stored.
Cruise control lever
: To store the current speed or a higher speed; LIM indicator lamp= To call up the last speed stored? To store the current speed or a lower speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONICYou can operate cruise control and variableSPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you have selected:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control isselected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable SPEED-TRONIC is selected.
You can use the cruise control lever to limit thespeed to any speed above 30 km/h while theengine is running.
Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed? To activate or reduce speed
Driving systems 145
Drivingandparking
Z
A To switch between cruise control and varia-ble SPEEDTRONIC
B To deactivate cruise controlIf you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED-TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of accidentnor override the laws of physics. SPEEDTRONICcannot take account of road, weather and trafficconditions. SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. Youare responsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good timeand for staying in lane. Only engage SPEED-TRONIC when the current road, weather andtraffic conditions permit it to be done safely.Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distanceto the vehicle in front.X Check whether LIM indicator lamp; is on.If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is alreadyselected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrowA.LIM indicator lamp; in the cruise controllever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC isselected.
Storing the current speed
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlYou can use the cruise control lever to limit thespeed to any speed above 18 mph while theengine is running.
X Briefly press the cruise control lever up: ordown?.The current speed is stored and shown in themultifunction display.
Calling up the last speed stored
: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and varia-
ble SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlIf you fail to adapt your driving style, SPEED-TRONIC can neither reduce the risk of accidentnor override the laws of physics. SPEEDTRONICcannot take account of road, weather and trafficconditions. SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. Youare responsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good timeand for staying in your lane. Only activateSPEEDTRONIC when the prevailing road,weather and traffic conditions permit. Drivecarefully and maintain a suitable distance to thevehicle in front.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou=.
i If you call up the stored speed and your cur-rent speed is higher, you will hear a warningtone. You will see the Limit Exceededmes-sage in the multifunction display.
i If no speed is stored, variable SPEED-TRONIC stores the current speed and main-tains it.
146 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC
There are several ways to deactivate variableSPEEDTRONIC:X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwardsB.
orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrowA.LIM indicator lamp; in the cruise controllever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC isdeactivated.Cruise control is selected.
It is not possible to deactivate variable SPEED-TRONIC by braking.If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point (kickdown), variable SPEED-TRONIC is automatically deactivated . but only ifyour current speed does not differ by more than12 mph from the stored speed. You will hear awarning tone if this is the case.
DISTRONIC PLUS
Important safety notes
G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-ped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-uation and be ready to brake.
G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-tify other road users and complex traffic sit-uations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate or brake unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.
G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If thisbraking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.
G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONICPLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUScannot take account of road, weather and trafficconditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. Youare responsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in good timeand for staying in your lane. Only engageDISTRONIC PLUS when the current road,weather and traffic conditions permit it to bedone safely, and adapt your driving style accord-
Driving systems 147
Drivingandparking
Z
ingly. Drive carefully andmaintain a suitable dis-tance to the vehicle in front.When DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of colli-sion with the vehicle in front but is unable tosufficiently decelerate the vehicle in order tomaintain the set distance from the vehicle infront, you will be warned visually and acousti-cally. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a colli-sion without your intervention. An intermittentwarning tone will then sound and the distancewarning lampwill light up in the instrument clus-ter. Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front, or take eva-sive action, provided it is safe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-cles driving on a different line. Therefore, alwayspay attention to traffic conditions even whenDISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Otherwise, youmay fail to recognize dangers in time, cause anaccident and injure yourself and others.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthe sensor is dirty or coveredRthere is snow or heavy rainRthere is interference by other radar sourcesRthere is the possibility of strong radar reflec-tions, for example, in parking garages.
If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the vehiclebrakes automatically in certain situations. Thiscan happen unexpectedly, especially when tow-ing or in a car wash. There is a risk of an acci-dent. In these or similar situations, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS.If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, thefollowing activation conditions must be fulfilled(Y page 149) and the radar sensor system mustbe operational.
General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-matically helps you maintain the distance to thevehicle detected in front. DISTRONIC PLUSbrakes automatically so that the set speed is notexceeded.On long and steep downhill gradients, especiallyif the vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, youmust select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. Bydoing so, you will make use of the braking effectof the engine. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes from overheat-ing and wearing too quickly.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-movingvehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order tomaintain the preset distance to the vehicle infront.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUSoperates in the sameway as cruise control in thespeed range between 20 mph (Canada:30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h). Ifa vehicle is driving in front of you, it operates inthe speed range between 0 mph (0 km/h) and120 mph (Canada: 200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, itcan resemble the radar detectors of the respon-sible authorities. You can refer to the relevantchapter in the Operator's Manual if questionsare asked about this.
i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.
i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of the devicewill void any warranties, and is not permitted.Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.
148 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
Cruise control lever
: To activate or increase speed; To set the specified minimum distance= LIM indicator lamp? To activate at the current speed/last stored
speedA To activate or reduce speedB To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and
variable SPEEDTRONICC To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUSWith the cruise control lever, you can operateDISTRONIC PLUS and variable SPEEDTRONIC.X To switch between variable SPEED-TRONIC and DISTRONIC PLUS: press thecruise control lever in the direction of arrowB.
LIM indicator lamp= on the cruise control leverindicates which function you have selected:RLIM indicator lamp= off:DISTRONIC PLUSis selected.RLIM indicator lamp= on: variable SPEED-TRONIC is selected.
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-lowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up totwo minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must be released.Rthe differential lock must be disengaged.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.
Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmustbe closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must be selec-ted (Y page 149).Rthe transfer casemust be in theHIGHRANGEtransmission position.Rthe vehicle must not be on an uphill or down-hill gradient of more than 22‑25%.Rthe radar sensor must be free from dirt(Y page 244).
Activating while driving
When driving at speeds below 20 mph(30 km/h), you can activate DISTRONIC PLUS ifthe vehicle in front has been detected and isshown in themultifunction display. If the vehiclein front is no longer detected and displayed,DISTRONIC PLUS switches off and a tonesounds.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, or press it up: or downA.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X Press the cruise control lever up: or downA repeatedly until the desired speed is set.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.
i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive mes-sage appears in themultifunction display. Theset distance to a slower-moving vehicle infront will then not be maintained. You will bedriving at the speed you determine by theposition of the accelerator pedal.
Driving systems 149
Drivingandparking
Z
Switching on while stationaryThis function may be useful if you want to keepup with the traffic flow, e.g. at the end of a tail-back.You can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if:Rthe vehicle in front andRyour vehicle are stationaryX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, or press it up: or downA.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activatedwhen the vehicle is stationary and at speedsbelow 20 mph (30 km/h) if a vehicle in fronthas been detected. Therefore, theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theinstrument cluster should be activated(Y page 178).
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed up: ordownA until the desired speed is set.i You can use the cruise control lever to setthe stored speed and the control on the cruisecontrol lever to set the specified minimumdistance (Y page 152).
Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicle acceler-ates or decelerates. If you do not know thestored speed, the vehicle could accelerate orbrake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-tions before calling up the stored speed. If youdo not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time itis activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-erwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to thepreviously stored value.
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
Pulling away and driving
X If the vehicle in front pulls away: removeyour foot from the brake pedal.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, or press it up: or downA.
orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speedto that of the vehicle in front.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUSoperates in the same way as cruise control.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. Inthis way, the distance you have selected ismain-tained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is driving faster, it accelerates your vehicle,but only up to the speed you have stored.If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.
Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph (60 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distanceto a vehicle in frontRyou switch on the appropriate turn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger ofcollision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle isaccelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted ifchanging lanes takes too long or if the distancebetween your vehicle and the vehicle in frontbecomes too small.
150 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drive vehi-cles and the right lane on right-hand drivevehicles.
StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle infront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it isstationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-tionary and you do not need to depress thebrake.
i Depending on the specified minimum dis-tance, your vehicle will come to a standstill ata sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.
On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there isa malfunction, the transmission may also auto-matically be shifted into position P.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-ometerWhen DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or twosegments; in the set speed range light up.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.
i For design reasons, the speed displayed inthe speedometer may differ slightly from thespeed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated
Distance display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-vated: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable? Own vehicleYou can select the distance display in the Assis-tance menu (Y page 178) of the on-board com-puter.
Driving systems 151
Drivingandparking
Z
X Select the Distance Display function usingthe on-board computer.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-ted
Distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS activatedin the multifunction display: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable= DISTRONIC PLUS activated? Own vehicleIn the Assistance menu (Y page 178) of the on-board computer, you can select the distancedisplay.X Select the Distance Display function usingthe on-board computer (Y page 178).
You will see the stored speed for about five sec-onds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
Setting a speed
: To store the current speed or a higher speed; To store the current speed or a lower speed
X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.
X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until thedesired speed is reached.
X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and adjusts the vehicle's speed tothe new speed stored.
X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-ments (1 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down; the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.
X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-ments (10 km/h increments): briefly pressthe cruise control lever up: or down; tothe pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever is pressedup: or down;, the last speed stored isincreased or reduced.
i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If you acceler-ate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored afteryou have finished overtaking.
Setting a specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance forDISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With this func-tion, you can set the minimum distance thatDISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,dependent on vehicle speed. You can see thisdistance in the multifunction display(Y page 178).
152 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
X To increase: turn control= in direction;.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.
X To decrease: turn control= in direction:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and the vehiclein front.
i Make sure that you maintain the minimumdistance to the vehicle in front as required bylaw. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in frontif necessary.
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever for-wards:.
orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationaryorX Briefly press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow=.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIM indi-cator lamp; in the cruise control lever lightsup.
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you willsee the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in themultifunction display for approximately five sec-onds.
i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivatedif:Ryou engage the parking brakeRyou are driving slower than 15mph (25 km/h)and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehiclein front is no longer detectedRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N positionRyou pull the cruise control lever towards youin order to pull away and the front-passengerdoor or one of the rear doors is openRthe vehicle has skiddedIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the DISTRONICPLUS Offmessage in the multifunction displayfor approximately five seconds.In the Assistance menu (Y page 178) of the on-board computer, you can select the distancedisplay.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you must beparticularly attentive. In such situations, brake ifnecessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactiva-ted.
Cornering, going into and coming out of abend
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle maybrake unexpectedly or late.
Driving systems 153
Drivingandparking
Z
Vehicles traveling on a different line
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles trav-eling on a different line. The distance to thevehicle in front will be too short.
Other vehicles changing lanes
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehiclecutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will betoo short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehi-cle in front on the edge of the road, because ofits narrow width. The distance to the vehicle infront will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstaclesor stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detec-ted vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obsta-cle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS willnot brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles that arecrossing your lane by mistake. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossingtraffic, for example, could cause your vehicle topull away unintentionally.
Blind Spot Assist
Important safety notes
G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle
154 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.In particular, the detection of obstacles can beimpaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRvisibility is poor, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRthere is a narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g.a motorcycle or bicycleRthe road has very wide lanesRthe road has narrow lanesRyou are not driving in the middle of the laneRthere are barriers or other road boundaries
i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCC asa "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensoris intended for use in an automotive radarsystem only. Removing, tampering with, oraltering the device will void any warranties,and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-per with, alter, or use in any non-approvedway.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user’s authority to operate theequipment.
General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system tomonitor both the left and right sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed of approx-imately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display inthe exterior mirrors draws your attention tovehicles detected in the monitored area. If youthen switch on the corresponding turn signal tochange lanes, you will also receive a visual andaudible collisionwarning. For this purpose, BlindSpot Assist uses sensors in the rear bumper.
Monitoring range of the sensors
Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next toyour vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehiclemay beindicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-ing in the middle of their lane. This may be thecase if the vehicles are driving on the inner sideof their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when drivingclose to crash barriers or similar solid laneborders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, such astrucks.
The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-grated into the sides of the rear bumper. Makesure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or slushin the vicinity of the sensors. The radar sensorsmust not be covered, for example by rear bicycleracks or overhanging loads. Following a severeimpact or in the event of damage to the bump-ers, have the function of the radar sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not work prop-erly.
Driving systems 155
Drivingandparking
Z
Indicator and warning display
G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles being overtaken at a speed differ-ence of more than 7.5 mph (12 km/h)Rvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditions care-fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampWhen Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights up yellowat speeds of up to 20mph (30 km/h). At speedsabove 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lampgoes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp: on the cor-responding side lights up red. This warningoccurs when a vehicle enters the blind spotmonitoring range from behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, the warning onlyoccurs as long as the difference in speed is lessthan 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assistis no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warning lampsis adjusted automatically according to the ambi-ent light.
Collision warning
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring range ofBlind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-sponding turn signal, a double warning tonesounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. If the turnsignal remains on, vehicles detected are indica-ted by the flashing of red warning lamp:.There are no further warning tones.
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lampX Make sure that Blind Spot Assist is activatedin the on-board computer (Y page 178).
X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrors lightup red for approximately 1.5 seconds andthen turn yellow.
156 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
HOLD function
General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without the driverhaving to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.
i Do not use the HOLD function when drivingoff-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradientsor on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLDfunction cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-faces.
Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has been auto-matically switched off by the ECO start/stopfunctionRthe engine is runningRthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt isfastenedRthe transmission is in position D, R or NRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
Activating the HOLD functionThe vehicle's brakes are applied when the HOLDfunction is activated. For this reason, deactivatethe HOLD function while in the car wash or whiletowing.X Make sure that the activation conditions aremet.
X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal further untilë appears in the multifunction display.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.
i If depressing the brake pedal the first timedoes not activate the HOLD function, waitbriefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine com-partment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.
The HOLD function is deactivated automaticallyif:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a cer-tain amount of pressure untilë disap-pears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.On steep uphill or downhill gradients or if thereis a malfunction, the transmission may also beautomatically shifted into position P.
Permanent all-wheel drive! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.This may damage the transfer case. Damageof this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels mustremain either on the ground or be fully raised.Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-cle with all wheels in full contact with theground.
! When testing the parking brake, operate thevehicle only briefly (for a maximum of ten sec-onds) on a brake test dynamometer. Whendoing this, turn the SmartKey to position 0 or1 in the ignition. Failure to do this can causedamage to the drive train or the brake system.
Driving systems 157
Drivingandparking
Z
! A function or performance test should onlybe carried out on a two-axle dynamometer.Before you operate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damage thedrive train or the brake system.
The all-wheel drive system ensures that all fourwheels are permanently driven. The all-wheeldrive system improves vehicle traction togetherwith ESP® and 4ETS if a drive wheel spins due toinsufficient grip.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.RTake your foot off the accelerator, slowly,while the vehicle is in motion.
The permanent all-wheel drive system can nei-ther reduce the risk of accident nor override thelaws of physics if you fail to adapt your drivingstyle or if you are inattentive. The all-wheel drivesystem cannot take into account road, weatheror traffic conditions. The all-wheel drive systemis only an aid. You are responsible for maintain-ing a safe distance to the vehicle in front, forvehicle speed, for braking in good time and forstaying in lane.In wintry driving conditions, always use wintertires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains(Y page 264). Only in this way can themaximumeffect of all-wheel drive be achieved.For information on driving off-road, see(Y page 137).
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, such asflower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONICdoes not detect such objects when they are inthe immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Youcould damage the vehicle or the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic carwash, the compressed-air brakes on a truckor a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONICto malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and audi-bly the distance between your vehicle and anobject.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-ment for your attention to your immediate sur-roundings. You are always responsible for safemaneuvering, parking and exiting a parkingspace. Ensure that the areas in front, behind andto the side of the vehicle are safe before maneu-vering, parking or pulling away. There must notbe any persons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.PARKTRONIC does not take into account anypersons or objects located below or above thedetection range. As a result, PARKTRONIC can-not warn you about objects in this area.PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.
Range of the sensors
General notes
: Example: sensors in the front bumper, right-hand side
158 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
Side view
Top viewThe sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.Otherwise, they may not function correctly.Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not toscratch or damage them (Y page 244).
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm from the brushguard)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 36 in (90 cm) fromthe spare wheel
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)
Corners Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-evant warning displays light up and a warningtone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-imum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Warning displays
Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-
cle; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle= Segments showing operational readinessThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is located onthe dashboard above the center air vents. Thewarning display for the rear area is located onthe headliner in the rear compartment.The warning display for each side of the vehicleis divided into five yellow and two red segments.PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segmentsshowing operational readiness= light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rolling deter-mine which warning display is active when theengine is running.
Transmission posi-tion
Warning display
D Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle isrolling backwards
Rear and front areasactivated
P No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-cle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-mittent warning tone for approximately twoseconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately two seconds.
Driving systems 159
Drivingandparking
Z
This indicates that you have now reached theminimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONICIf indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.
i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock.
Towing a trailerPARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.
160 Driving systemsDrivingandparking
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit. Youalso hear a warning tonefor approximately twoseconds.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after a few sec-onds, and the indicatorlamp in the PARKTRONICbutton lights up.
PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Only the red segments inthe PARKTRONIC warn-ing displays are lit.PARKTRONIC is deacti-vated after a few sec-onds.
The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 244).X Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-sound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Rear view camera
Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to your immedi-ate surroundings. You are always responsiblefor safemaneuvering and parking.Whenmaneu-vering or parking, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area in whichyou are maneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will function ina limited manner:Rthe rear door is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LEDlighting (the display may flicker)Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-terRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In thisevent, have the camera position and settingchecked at a qualified specialist workshop
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for thispurpose
Activating/deactivating the rear viewcamera
: Rear view camera
Driving systems 161
Drivingandparking
Z
X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey isin position 2 in the ignition lock.
X Make sure that the "rear view camera" func-tion is selected in COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions for COMAND).
X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display.
To deactivate: the rear view camera is deacti-vated if you:Rshift the transmission to position PRdrive forward ten metersRshift the transmission from R to another posi-tion after 15 secondsRdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph(10 km/h)
Off-road driving systems
Transfer case
General notesThe vehicle has permanent all-wheel drive.Power is always transmitted to both axles.For further information on driving off-road, see(Y page 137).
Shift ranges
G WARNINGIf you do not wait for the transfer case gearchange process to complete, the transfercase could remain in the neutral position. Thepower transmission to the driven wheels isthen interrupted. There is a danger of thevehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is arisk of an accident.
Wait until the transfer case shift process iscompleted.
Do not switch off the enginewhile changing gearand do not shift the automatic transmission toanother gear.
HIGHRANGE
Position for all normal on-road driving conditions
LOW RANGE Low-range position for drivingoff-road.Also for use on steep uphill ordownhill gradients, especiallywhen towing a trailer.The vehicle travels aroundhalf the speed of on-road driv-ing range HIGH RANGE. Thetractive power is correspond-ingly higher.
Shifting the transfer case
Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the transfer case is in the neutral posi-tion, power transmission to the driven wheelsis interrupted. As a result, the vehicle couldroll away. There is a risk of an accident.Secure the vehiclewith the parking brake, andon uphill or downhill gradients, also secure itwith a device such as a wheel chock.
Always wait for the gear change process fromHIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE and from LOWRANGE to HIGH RANGE to complete. Do notswitch off the enginewhile changing gear and donot shift the automatic transmission to anothergear.
General notes
: Current shift range
162 Off-road driving systemsDrivingandparking
: Indicator lamp; LOW RANGE button
Switching on the off-road gear ratio! Only carry out the gear selection if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe vehicle is rolling.Rthe automatic transmission is in selectorlever position N.Ryou are driving no faster than 25 mph(40 km/h).
You could otherwise damage the transfercase.
X Make sure the ECO start/stop function isswitched off (Y page 114).
X Press LOW RANGE button;.When the shift procedure is complete, theLOW RANGE transfer case position appears inthe multifunction display.Indicator lamp: lights up.
X Shift the transmission to position D.
Switching off the off-road gear ratioG WARNINGWhen the transfer case is in the neutral posi-tion, power transmission to the driven wheels
is interrupted. As a result, the vehicle couldroll away. There is a risk of an accident.Secure the vehiclewith the parking brake, andon uphill or downhill gradients, also secure itwith a device such as a wheel chock.
! Only carry out the gear selection if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe vehicle is rolling.Rthe automatic transmission is in selectorlever position N.Ryou are driving no faster than 43 mph(70 km/h).
You could otherwise damage the transfercase.
X Press button;.When the shift procedure is complete, theHIGH RANGE transfer case position appears inthe multifunction display.Indicator lamp: goes out.
If the gear change is not completed, the follow-ing messages could appear in the display:RTC Shift Conditions Not FulfilledYou have not met one or more shift condi-tions.RTC NEUTRAL OnThe transfer case has canceled the gearchange process and is in N. Transfer caseposition N appears in the multifunction dis-play.RTC Shift CanceledThe transfer case has canceled the gearchange process.
X Carry out the gear change process again.Make sure to meet all conditions for changinggears.RTC Malfunction Visit WorkshopThere is a malfunction in the transfer case.
X Do not shift the transfer case.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possibleat a qualified specialist workshop.
Shifting to neutralG WARNINGWhen the transfer case is in the neutral posi-tion, power transmission to the driven wheels
Off-road driving systems 163
Drivingandparking
Z
is interrupted. As a result, the vehicle couldroll away. There is a risk of an accident.Secure the vehiclewith the parking brake, andon uphill or downhill gradients, also secure itwith a device such as a wheel chock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X Apply the parking brake.X Depress the brake pedal.X Move the selector lever to position N(Y page 119).
X Press and hold LOW RANGE button; forapproximately ten seconds.When the shift procedure is complete, the TCIn Neutral message appears in the multi-function display for five seconds.
If the gear change is not completed, the follow-ing messages could appear in the display(Y page 195).
i If the transfer case is inneutral, the key is inthe ignition lock and you open the driver'sdoor, the TC In Neutralmessage appears inthe multifunction display. If you then releasethe parking brake, a warning tone will sound.
Differential locks
General notes
G WARNINGWhen the differential locks are engaged, ABS,4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivated. As aresult, the wheels could lock when brakingand the braking distance is increased. There isa risk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm surfaces with good grip.
! In order to avoid damage to the transfercase, you must operate the vehicle on a dyna-mometer (1-axle dynamometer) only if:Rthe axle not driven on is jacked uporRthe corresponding propeller shaft is dis-connected and the transfer case differen-tial lock is engaged.
Otherwise, the transfer case can be damaged.
Differential locks improve the traction of thevehicle.Your vehicle is equipped with a differential lockeach for:Rthe transfer case: this controls the balancebetween the front and rear axles.Rthe rear axle: this controls the balancebetween the wheels on the rear axle.Rthe front axle: this controls the balancebetween the wheels on the front axle.
Information on differential gear systemand differential lockWhen the vehicle drives around a curve, thewheels on the outside of the curve must cover agreater distance. Therefore, the wheels turnmore rapidly than on the inside. The differential,a gear system in the drive train, allows for dif-fering rotational speeds and facilitates corner-ing.The disadvantage of a differential is that thewheels that have the least grip, get the mostdrive. An example: a wheel of a driven axle is ona snow-covered surface and therefore does nothave any traction. The differential sendsmost ofthe drive force to this wheel because the forcetakes the route of the lowest resistance. Theopposite wheel on this axle, however, whichstands on firm ground and could therefore allowpropulsion, receives no driving power. 4ETScompensates for this disadvantage. 4ETS pro-vides good steerability by automatically brakingthe spinning wheel. 4ETS provides the wheel onthe firm surface with more drive force, which inturn provides propulsion.ESP® and 4ETS are traction systems that areideal for road driving and suitable for light off-road driving. The LOW RANGE off-road gearalso improves off-road capability.More challenging off-road conditions requireadditional measures such as locking one ormore differential. Your vehicle is equipped withthree differential locks:Ra central differential lock for the transfer caseRa differential lock for the front axle andRa differential lock for the rear axleEach differential lock can be engaged with thecorresponding switch on the center console. Ifthe differential in the transfer case is locked, thefront and rear wheels rotate at the same speed.If the differential for the rear axle is locked, both
164 Off-road driving systemsDrivingandparking
rear wheels rotate at the same speed, regard-less of their respective torque. Note, engagingthe differential lock greatly impairs the vehicle'ssteerability.Note, it is imperative to use the differential func-tion when driving on firm road surfaces. Underno circumstances should the differential belocked when driving on firm road surfaces. Oth-erwise, the vehiclemay not be steerable and youcould lose control of the vehicle. Therefore, onlyengage the differential lock when driving off-road. You should only engage the differentiallock if activating 4ETS and ESP® driving systemsand LOW RANGE off-road gear prove to beinsufficient.
Engaging the differential locks
Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen differential locks are engaged on a firm,high-grip surface, the vehicle's steerability isgreatly impaired. In particular, engaging thedifferential locks when cornering could leadto you losing control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm surfaces with good grip.
G WARNINGWhen the differential locks are engaged, ABS,4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivated. As aresult, the wheels could lock when brakingand the braking distance is increased. There isa risk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm surfaces with good grip.
! Only engage the differential locks when:Ryou are driving at walking pace.Rthe driven wheels are not spinning.Ryou are not driving on a firm road surface.
General notesThe switches are located on the center console.
: Function indicator lamps (red); Differential lock for the front axle= Differential lock for the transfer case? Differential lock for the rear axleA Activation indicator lamps (yellow)Engage the differential locks:Roff-roadRto deactivate ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS whileoff-roadRwhen fordingFor further information on driving off-road, see(Y page 137).
i You can engage the differential locks in thefollowing order:=,?,;.
Differential lock for the transfer caseX To engage: switch the transfer case to theLOW RANGE off-road driving position(Y page 162).
X Press switch=.If the transfer case is in the LOW RANGE off-road position, the yellow activation indicatorlamp under switch= lights up.The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.If the differential is locked, the red functionindicator lamp above switch= lights up.In the multifunction display you see the:ABS not available differentiallocked message.The å!÷ warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.The differential lock for the transfer case isengaged.4ETS, ESP®, BAS and ABS are deactivated.
Off-road driving systems 165
Drivingandparking
Z
The vehicle's ability to steer is severely restric-ted. Drive carefully and accelerate gently foroptimum traction.
i You can now engage the differential lock forrear axle? and the differential lock for frontaxle; as required.
Differential lock for the rear axleX To engage: press switch?.Yellow activation indicator lampA lights upfirst, followed by red function indicatorlamp: of switch?.The differential lock for the rear axle isengaged.
Differential lock for the front axleX To engage: press switch;.First, the yellow activation indicator lamplights up, followed by the red function indica-tor lamp.The differential lock for the front axle isengaged.
Disengaging the differential locksYou can disengage the differential locks in thefollowing order:;,?,=.X To simultaneously disengage all differen-tial locks: press switch=.Yellow activation indicator lampsA and redfunction indicator lamps: go out.After approximately three seconds of normaldriving, ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS are activa-ted.The ABS not available differentiallockedmessage disappears in the multifunc-tion display and the å, ! and ÷warning lamps in the instrument cluster goout.
X Shift the transfer case to the HIGH RANGEon-road position (Y page 162).
i If red function indicator lamps: do not goout when disengaging the differential locks,stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, inaccordance with the traffic conditions. Then,continue driving and the load change canrelease the differential lock.
Towing a trailer
Notes on towing a trailer
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.
G WARNINGWhen the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehi-cle/trailer combination could even rollover.There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten up the vehicle/trailer combinationby increasing the speed. Reduce vehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Apply thebrake as necessary.
G WARNINGIf you install a ball coupling other than the onedeliveredwith the vehicle, the trailer tow hitchand the rear axle may be overloaded. Thisapplies especially if the ball coupling in ques-tion is longer or angled differently. This couldseriously impair the driving characteristicsand the trailer can come loose. There is a riskof an accident.Only install the ball coupling delivered withthe vehicle or a ball coupling that is designedto meet your trailer towing requirements. Donot modify the ball coupling or the trailer towhitch.
G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and thecorresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.
166 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking
Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.
Please observe the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for the trailer coupling if a detach-able trailer coupling is used.Exceeding the maximum permissible nose-weight may cause damage to the following:Ryour vehicleRthe trailerRthe ball couplingRtrailer tow hitchThe vehicle/trailer combination could becomeunstable.If the noseweight used is lower than the mini-mum permissible noseweight, the vehicle/trailer combination could also become unstable.To avoid hazardous situations:Rmake sure to check the noseweight beforeeach journeyRuse a drawbar noseweight as close as possi-ble to the maximum noseweightRdo not exceed the maximum permissiblenoseweightRdo not use a noseweight lower than the min-imum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight
When backing up the vehicle towards the trailer,make sure there is nobody between the trailerand the vehicle.The applicable permissible values, which mustnot be exceeded, can be found:Rin your vehicle documentsRon the type plate of the trailer tow hitch andtrailerRon the vehicle identification plateCouple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If youdo not couple the trailer to the towing vehiclecorrectly, the trailer could become detached.Make sure that the following values are notexceeded:Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towingvehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicleweight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailer
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and gradient-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning radiusThis could impair the handling characteristics.Adapt your driving style accordingly. Maintain asafe distance. Drive carefully.When towing a trailer, always adjust your speedto the current road and weather conditions. Donot exceed the maximum permissible speed foryour vehicle/trailer combination.You will find the values approved by the manu-facturer on the vehicle identification plates andthose for the towing vehicle in the "Technicaldata" section (Y page 297).
General notesRDo not exceed the legally prescribed maxi-mum speed for vehicle/trailer combinationsin the relevant country.This lowers the risk of an accident.ROnly install an approved trailer coupling onyour vehicle.Further information on availability and oninstallation is available from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not suitablefor installing detachable trailer couplings.RDo not install hired trailer couplings or otherdetachable trailer couplings on the bumpersof your vehicle.RIf you do not need the ball coupling, removethe ball coupling from the ball couplingrecess. This reduces the risk of damage to theball coupling.
i Check the tire pressures when towing atrailer. You will find the values in the tire pres-sure table in the fuel filler flap of the vehicle(Y page 266).
You will find installation dimensions and loadsunder "Technical data" (Y page 297).
Towing a trailer 167
Drivingandparking
Z
The maximum noseweight of the trailer drawbaron the ball coupling for up to 3 people is 562 lbs(255 kg). Themaximumpermissible trailer draw-bar noseweight for more than 3 persons and themaximum load in the trunk can be found in thetrailer drawbar noseweight table (Y page 298).However, the actual noseweight must notexceed the value given on the trailer tow hitch ortrailer identification plates. The lowest weightapplies.Please note that when towing a trailer,PARKTRONIC (Y page 158) and Blind SpotAssist (Y page 154) are only available with lim-itations, or not at all.
i On vehicles without level control, the heightof the ball coupling will alter according to theload placed on the vehicle. If necessary, use atrailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.
Driving tipsX On long and steep downhill gradients, selectshift range 1, 2 or 3 (Y page 123) in goodtime.i This also applies if you have activated cruisecontrol or SPEEDTRONIC.
X If necessary, shift the transfer case to LOWRANGE (Y page 162).This will use the braking effect of the engine,so that less braking will be required to main-tain the speed. This relieves the load on thebrake system and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly. If youneed additional braking, depress the brakepedal repeatedly rather than continuously.
The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type oftrailer. Before beginning the journey, check thetrailer's documents to see what the maximumpermissible speed is. Observe the legally pre-scribedmaximum speed in the relevant country.For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, the maxi-mum permissible rear axle load is increasedwhen towing a trailer. Refer to the "Technicaldata" section to find out whether this applies toyour vehicle. If you utilize any of the added max-imum rear axle load when towing a trailer, thevehicle/trailer combination may not exceed amaximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for rea-sons concerning the operating permit. This alsoapplies in countries in which the permissiblemaximum speed for vehicle/trailer combina-tions is above 60 mph (100 km/h).
When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparison towhen driving without a trailer and it will con-sume more fuel.On long and steep downhill gradients, you mustselect shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time.
i This also applies if you have activated cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.
This will use the braking effect of the engine, sothat less braking will be required tomaintain thespeed. This relieves the load on the brake sys-tem and prevents the brakes from overheatingand wearing too quickly. If you need additionalbraking, depress the brake pedal repeatedlyrather than continuously.
Driving tipsIf the trailer swings from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.RMaintain a greater distance from the vehiclein front than when driving without a trailer.RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gen-tly at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then,increase the braking force rapidly.RThe values given for gradient-climbing capa-bilities from a standstill refer to sea level.When driving in mountainous areas, note thatthe power output of the engine and, conse-quently, the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-bility, decreases with increasing altitude.
Trailer power supply! You can connect accessories with a maxi-mum power consumption of 180 W to thepermanent power supply.Youmust not charge a trailer battery using thepower supply.
The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped atthe factory with a permanent power supply.The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 9.A qualified specialist workshop can providemore information about installing the trailerelectrics.
168 Towing a trailerDrivingandparking
Trailer with 7-pin connector
General notesYou canmake a connection to the 13-pin socketon the ball coupling using an adapter or, if nec-essary, an adapter cable. Both can be obtainedin a qualified specialist workshop.
Installing the adapter! Make sure that there is enough slack in thecable for cornering so that the cable cannotbecome detached.
X Open the socket cover.X Insert the connector with lug: intogroove; on the socket and turn it clockwiseto the stop.
X Make the cover engage.X If you are using an adapter cable, secure thecable to the trailer with cable ties.
i When the socket is connected, the backingup aid is deactivated.
Towing a trailer 169
Drivingandparking
Z
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.
G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed or mal-functioned, you may not recognize functionrestrictions in systems relevant to safety. Theoperating safety of your vehicle may beimpaired. There is a risk of an accident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshop immedi-ately.
The on-board computer only showsmessages orwarnings from certain systems in the multifunc-tion display. You should therefore make sureyour vehicle is operating safely at all times. Oth-erwise, a vehicle that is not operating safelymaycause an accident.Youmust observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are currently driving whenoperating the on-board computer.For an illustration of the instrument cluster, see(Y page 171).
170 Important safety notesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Displays and operation
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster lightingThe brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 171).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise orcounter-clockwise.If the light switch is set toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent upon thebrightness of the ambient light.
i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness of themultifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.
Displaying the coolant temperature
G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.
! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The enginewill otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gage is in the instru-ment cluster on the right-hand side(Y page 171).Under normal operating conditions and with thespecified coolant level, the coolant temperaturemay rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as thiscould damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-play indicates the temperature measured anddoes not record the road temperature.The outside temperature display is in the multi-function display (Y page 173).Changes in the outside temperature are dis-played after a short delay.
Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 141):The segments light up from the stored speedto the maximum speed.RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated(Y page 145):The segments light up from the start of thescale to the selected limit speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 149):One or two segments in the set speed rangelight up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of the vehi-cle in front and the stored speed light up.
Displays and operation 171
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
: Multifunction display; Switches on the Voice Control System (see
the separate operating instructions)= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back buttonX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock(Y page 112).
You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer using thebuttons on the multifunction steering wheel.
Left control panel
=
;
RCalls up the menu and menu bar
9
:
Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects astored station, an audio track or avideo sceneRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephone num-ber
9
:
Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open
a RConfirms a selection/display mes-sageRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the Audio menu: stops the sta-tion search function at the desiredstation
Right control panel
~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial memory
6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory
WX
RAdjusts the volume
8 RMute
Back button
% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem (see the separate operat-ing instructions)RHides display messages/calls upthe last Trip menu function usedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory
% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in theTrip menu
172 Displays and operationOn
-board
computerand
displays
Multifunction display
: Transmission position (Y page 121); Drive program (Y page 122)= Text field? Menu barA Outside temperature or speed
(Y page 179)B TimeC Transfer case position (Y page 162)X To show menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.
Menu bar? disappears after a few seconds.Text field= shows the selected menu or sub-menu as well as display messages.For further information on displaying the trans-mission position, see (Y page 119).
i You can set the time using COMAND (seethe separate operating instructions).
The following messages may appear in the mul-tifunction display:Z Shift recommendation (Y page 124)¯ Cruise control (Y page 141)LIM SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 145)è ECO start/stop function
(Y page 114)LOWRANGE LOW RANGE off-road gear
(Y page 162)ë HOLD function (Y page 157)
Menus and submenus
Menu overviewPress the= or; button on the steeringwheel to call up themenu bar and select amenu.Operating the on-board computer (Y page 172).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 173)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 174)RAudio menu (Y page 176)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 177)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 178)RServ menu (Y page 178)RSett menu (settings) (Y page 178)RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 182)
Trip menu
Standard display
X Press and hold the% button on the steer-ing wheel until the Tripmenu with trip odom-eter: and odometer; is shown.
Trip computer "From start" or "Fromreset"
Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time
Menus and submenus 173
On-board
computera
nddisplays
Z
= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press9 or: to select From Start orFrom Reset.The values in the From Start submenu are cal-culated from the start of a journey whilst thevalues in the From Reset submenu are calcu-lated from the last time the submenu was reset(Y page 174).The From Start trip computer is automaticallyreset when:Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From Reset trip computer is automaticallyreset if the value exceeds 9999 hours or99,999 miles.
Range
: Approximate rangeX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press9 or: to select the approximaterange.
The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your current driv-ing style. If there is only a small amount of fuelleft in the fuel tank, the display shows a vehiclebeing refueledC instead of the range.
Digital speedometer
: Digital speedometerX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.
Resetting values
Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Trip menu.
X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.
X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select Yes and pressthea button to confirm.
You can reset the values of the following func-tions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computer
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.For further information, see the separate oper-ating instructions.
174 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate oper-ating instructions).
X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Navi menu.
Route guidance not active
: Direction of travel; Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
: Distance to destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol
Change of direction announced without alane recommendation
: Road into which the change of directionleads
; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display
= Change-of-direction symbolWhen a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as youapproach the point of the announced change ofdirection.
Change of direction announced with alane recommendation
: Road into which the change of directionleads
; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display
= Lane recommendation? New lane during a change of directionA Uninterrupted laneB Change-of-direction symbolOn multilane roads, the system can display lanerecommendation= for the next change ofdirection. During the change of direction, addi-tional lanes may be displayed.Lane recommendations are only displayed if therelevant data is available on the digital map.
Other status indicators of the naviga-tion systemRO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.RNew Route... or Calculating Route: cal-culating a new routeROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digital map(off-map position)RNo Route: no route could be calculated to theselected destination
Menus and submenus 175
On-board
computera
nddisplays
Z
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
: Waveband; Station frequency with memory positioni Station; is displayed with the station fre-quency or station name. Thememory positionis only displayed along with station; if thishas been stored.
X Switch on COMAND and select Radio (see theseparate operating instructions).
X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select a stored station: briefly press the9 or: button.
X To select a station from the station list:press and briefly hold the9 or: but-ton.
If no station list is received:X To select a station using the stationsearch: press and briefly hold the9or: button.
i For information on switching wavebandsand storing stations, (see the separate oper-ating instructions).
i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radio oper-ation, see the separate operating instruc-tions.
Operating audio devices or media
Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current CD in the CD/DVD changer; Current titleAudio data from various audio devices or mediacan be played, depending on the equipmentinstalled in the vehicle.X Switch on COMAND and select the audiodevice ormedium (see the separate operatinginstructions).
X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.
X To select the next/previous track: brieflypress the9 or: button.
X To select a track from the track list (rapidscrolling): press and hold the9 or:button until desired track; has beenreached.If you press and hold9 or:, the rapidscrolling speed is increased. Not all audiodrives or data carriers support this function.
If track information is stored on the audio deviceor medium, the multifunction display will showthe number and title of the track.
Video DVD operation
Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current DVD in the CD/DVD changer; Current sceneX Switch on COMAND and select video DVD(see the separate operating instructions).
X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Audio menu.
176 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computerand
displays
X To select the next/previous scene: brieflypress the9 or: button.
X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9or: button until desired scene; hasbeen reached.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G WARNINGIf you operate information systems and com-munication equipment integrated in the vehi-cle while driving, you will be distracted fromtraffic conditions. You could also lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate the equip-ment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legalrequirements for the country in which you arecurrently driving.X Switch on themobile phone (see the separateoperating instructions).
X Switch on COMAND (see the separate oper-ating instructions).
X Establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND, see the separate operating instruc-tions.
X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.
You will see one of the following display mes-sages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found a net-work and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searching fora network.
Accepting a call
Example: incoming callIf someone calls you when you are in the Telmenu, a display message appears in the multi-function display.X Press the6 button on the steering wheelto accept an incoming call.
You can accept a call even if you are not in theTel menu.Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steering wheel.You can end or reject a call even if you are not inthe Tel menu.Dialing a number from the phone bookX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.
X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.
orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold the9 or: button for longer than one sec-ond.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.
X If only one telephone number is stored fora name: press the6 ora button tostart dialing.
orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.
X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.
X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.
Menus and submenus 177
On-board
computera
nddisplays
Z
orX To exit the telephone book: press the~or% button.
RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last names ornumbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Tel menu.
X Press the6 button to switch to the redialmemory.
X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.
X Press the6 orabutton to start dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~or% button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
In the DriveAssistmenu, you have the follow-ing options:RShowing the distance display (Y page 178)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist(Y page 178)
Showing the distance displayX Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the9 or: button to select Dis‐tance Display.X Press thea button.The DISTRONIC PLUS distance displayappears in the multifunction display(Y page 151).
Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the DriveAssist menu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot Asst.X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.
X To activate/deactivate: press thea but-ton again.
For further information about Blind Spot Assist,see (Y page 154).
Service menu
Example: service menuIn the Service menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages (Y page 184)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 270)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 240)REngine oil, check oil level (Y page 236)
Settings menu
Introduction
Example: settings menuIn the Sett. menu, you have the followingoptions:
178 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computerand
displays
RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 179)RChanging the light settings (Y page 179)RChanging the vehicle settings (Y page 180)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 181)RRestoring the factory settings (Y page 181)
Instrument cluster
Selecting the unit ofmeasurement for dis-tanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-tifunction display.You can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles or kilo-meters.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theInst. Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-tion.You will see the selected setting: km or miles.
X Press thea button to save the setting.The selected unit of measurement for distanceapplies to:RVehicles with instrument cluster in kilo-meters: digital speedometer in the TripmenuRthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the Navi menuRcruise controlRSPEEDTRONICRDISTRONIC PLUSRthe service interval display
Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theInstr. Cluster submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting: OutsideTemperature or Speedometer [mph].
X Press thea button to save the setting.
i Speed is displayed in mph.
Lights
Setting the daytime running lampsi This function is not available in Canada.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the DaytimeRunning Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights have beenswitched on, the cone of light and theWsymbol in themultifunction display are shownin red.
X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on daytime running lamps(Y page 85).
Surround lighting and exterior lightingdelayed switch-offX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theLight submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the SurroundLighting function.When the Surround Lighting function isactivated, the cone of light in the multifunc-tion display is shown in red.
X Press thea button to save the setting.
Menus and submenus 179
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exteriorlighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKeyto position 0 (Y page 112) in the ignition lock.
X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start the engine.If you have activated the Surround Lightingfunction and the light switch is set toÃ, thefollowing functions are activated when it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine, thesurround lighting is switched off and auto-matic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 85).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for 60 secondsafter the engine is switched off. If you close allthe doors and the trunk lid, the exterior light-ing goes off after 15 seconds.
i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, the follow-ing light up:RParking lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior light-ing delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior Lighting Delayfunction, the interior lighting remains on for20 seconds after you remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theLights submenu.X Pressa to confirm.
X Press: or9 to select the InteriorLighting Delay function.When the Interior Lighting Delay func-tion is activated, the vehicle interior is dis-played in red in the multifunction display.
X Press thea button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you activate the Automatic Door Lock func-tion, the vehicle is centrally locked above aspeed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicle submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door Lock function.When the Automatic Door Lock function isactivated, the vehicle doors are displayed inred in the multifunction display.
X Press thea button to save the setting.For further information on the automatic lockingfeature, see (Y page 66).
Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, anacoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-cle.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press: or9 to select the Vehiclesubmenu.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunction displaylights up red.
X Press thea button to save the setting.
180 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
Convenience
Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-ing adjustments, make sure that no one hasany body parts in the sweep of the steeringwheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheel adjust-ment in the opposite direction to that inwhich the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function is activated,the vehicle steering wheel appears in red inthe multifunction display.
X Press thea button to save the setting.Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 79).
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-ing feature on/offWhen you activate the Auto. Mirror Foldingfunction, the exterior mirrors are folded in whenthe vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicleand then open a door, the exterior mirrors foldout again.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenience submenu.X Pressa to confirm.
X Press: or9 to select the Auto. Mir‐ror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is dis-played in red in the multifunction display.
X Press thea button to save the setting.
: To fold the exterior mirrors in or outIf you have switched the Auto. Mirror Fold‐ing on and you fold the exterior mirrors in usingbutton:, they will not fold out automatically(Y page 80).You can then only fold out the exterior mirrorsusing button:.
Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Sett. menu.
X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings? messageappears.
X Press the: or9 button to select No orYes.X Pressa to confirm the selection.If you select Yes, the multifunction displayshows a confirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningLights function in the Lights submenu is onlyreset if the vehicle is stationary.
Menus and submenus 181
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
AMG menu in AMG vehicles
AMG displays
: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission fluid temperatureX Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.
Upshift indicator UP= indicates that the enginehas reached the over revving range when in themanual drive program. Upshift indicator UP=fades out other messages until you have shiftedup.If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡(80 †), the oil temperature is shown in blue.Avoid driving at full engine output during thistime.
SETUP
: Drive program (C/S/M); ESP® mode (ON/OFF)SETUP shows the drive program and the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the9 button repeatedly until SETUPis displayed.
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the function onpublic roads.
: Lap; RACETIMERYou can start theRACETIMERwhen the engine isrunning or if the key is in position2 (Y page 112)in the ignition lock.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the AMG menu.
X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.
X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. Time.X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.
182 Menus and submenusOn
-board
computerand
displays
Starting a new lap
: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Pressa to confirm New Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum of sixteenlaps. The 16th lap can only be completed withFinish Lap.
Stopping the RACETIMER
X Press the% button on the steering wheel.X Confirm Yes witha.The RACETIMER is interrupted if you stop thevehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1(Y page 112) in the ignition lock. If you turn theSmartKey to position 2 or 3 (Y page 112) andthen pressa to confirm Start, timing iscontinued.
Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER (Y page 183).X Press the= or; button to selectReset Lap.X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER isreset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. If youhave stopped 16 laps, the current lap does nothave to be reset.X Reset the current lap (Y page 183).X Pressa to confirm Reset.Reset Race Timer? appears in the multi-function display.
X Press the: button to select Yes and pressthea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speedThis function is shown if you have stored at leastone lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.
X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.
Lap statistics
: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lap
Menus and submenus 183
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
This function is only available if you have storedat least two laps and have stopped the RACE-TIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheel toselect the AMG menu.
X Press the9 button repeatedly until the lapevaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. Thefastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol:.
X Press the9 or: button to select a dif-ferent lap evaluation.
Display messages
Introduction
General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunctiondisplay.Display messages with graphic displays may beshown in simplified form in the Operator's Man-ual and may differ from the messages shown inthe multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the displaymessages and follow the additional notes in thisOperator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied byan audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When you stop and park the vehicle, pleaseobserve the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 157)RParking (Y page 130)
Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steeringwheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.
Display messages with a high priority are shownin red.You cannot hide displaymessages of the highestpriority. The multifunction display shows thesemessages continuously until the causes for themessages have been remedied.
Message memory menuThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages. You can call up the displaymessagesin themessage memory.X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunc-tion display shows 2 Messages, for example.
X Press the9 or: button to select theentry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scrollthrough the display messages.
When the ignition is switched off, all displaymessages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes ofthe high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messagesare also deleted.
184 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
!÷ABS, ESP DefectiveVisit Workshop
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program),BAS (BrakeAssist), theHOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailerstabilization are temporarily unavailable.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!÷Currently Unavaila‐ble See Operator'sManual
ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailerstabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and ! warning lamps light up in the instru-ment cluster.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages 185
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
÷ESP Defective VisitWorkshop
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer sta-bilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.The ÷ warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned aboveare available again.
If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!÷JABS, ESP, EBD Defec‐tive Visit Workshop
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailabledue to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷,J and ! warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lockif you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F(USA
only)!(Canadaonly)Release Park. Brake
You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.
186 Display messagesOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
$(USA
only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidLevel
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition,the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
#Check Brake Pad Wear
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Gmbrace Inoperative
USA only: one or more main functions of the mbrace system are mal-functioning.Canada only: one or more main functions of the TELE AID system aremalfunctioning.X USAonly: have thembrace system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.
X Canada only: have the Tele AID system checked at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
6SRS Malfunction Ser‐vice Required
The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up inthe instrument cluster.
G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 34).
6Front Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequiredorFrontRight MalfunctionService Required
The restraint system hasmalfunctioned at the front on the left or right.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 187
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
6Rear Left Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired or RearRight MalfunctionService Required
The rear left-hand or right-hand restraint system has malfunctioned.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6Rear Center Malfunc‐tion ServiceRequired
The rear center restraint systemhasmalfunctioned. The6warninglamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
6Left Side CurtainAirbag MalfunctionServiceRequiredorRightSide Curtain AirbagMalfunction ServiceRequired
There is amalfunction in the left-hand or right-handwindow curtain airbag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
188 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Front Passenger Air‐bag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualA BabySmart™ compatible child restraint system is installed on thefront-passenger seat.The 4 5 indicator lamp also lights up.The front-passenger air bag is therefore disabled.Further information on BabySmart™ (Y page 50).
Front Passenger Air‐bag Enabled SeeOperator's ManualThe 4 5 indicator lamp does not remain lit if a special Baby-Smart™-compatible child restraint system has been installed on thefront-passenger seat.The BabySmart™ system is malfunctioning.
G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag can be triggered unintentionally inthe event of an accident.There is a risk of an accident.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the childseat.
X Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.X If the 4 5 indicator lamps do not light up, have the Baby-Smart™ system checked as soon as possible at a qualified special-ist workshop.Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the air bagdeactivation system has been repaired.
Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
bCheck Left Low Beamor Check Right LowBeam
The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Trailer LeftTail Lamp or CheckTrailer Right TailLamp
The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Trailer LeftTurn SignalorCheckTrailer Right TurnSignal
The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 189
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
bCheck Trailer BrakeLamp
The trailer brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Rear LeftTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightTurn Signal
The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 93).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Front LeftTurn Signal orCheck Front RightTurn Signal
The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 93).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Left MirrorTurn Signal orCheck Right MirrorTurn Signal
The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defec-tive.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Center BrakeLamp
The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Left BrakeLamp or Check RightBrake Lamp
The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Replace the bulb (Y page 92).
bCheck Left HighBeamorCheck RightHigh Beam
The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bLicense Plate Lamp
There is a short circuit in the LED lamps. The LEDs have been switchedoff.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bRear Fog Lamp
The rear fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 93).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
190 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
bFront Left ParkingLamporFront RightParking Lamp
The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 93).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bBackup Light
The backup lamp is defective.X Replace the bulb (Y page 92).
bCheck Front LeftSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightSidemarker Lamp
The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 93).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Left TailLamp or Check RightTail Lamp
The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 93).
orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bCheck Left DaytimeRunningLightorCheck RightDaytime RunningLight
The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bMalfunction SeeOperator's Manual
The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bAuto Lamp FunctionInoperative
The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
bSwitch Off Lights
The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warningtone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.
Display messages 191
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Engine
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
+Check CoolantLevel. See Opera‐tor's Manual
The coolant level is too low.X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 238).
X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshopif the coolant needs topping up more often than usual.
? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain and stop-start traffic.
?Coolant Too HotStop Vehicle SwitchEngine Off
The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until theengine has cooled down.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Donot start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out andthe coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, theengine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).
192 Display messagesOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
The poly-V-belt may have torn.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Check the poly-V-belt.If the poly-V-belt is torn:
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting theengine. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:
! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
4Check Engine Oil AtNext Refueling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 236).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 237).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engineoil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
Display messages 193
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
4Engine Oil LevelLow Stop VehicleSwitch Engine Off
The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Add engine oil (Y page 237) and check the oil level (Y page 236).
4Check Engine OilLevel (Add 1 quart)
AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 236).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 237).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engineoil needs to be added more often than usual.
! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-erwise be damaged.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
4Engine Oil LevelCannot Be Measured
The measuring system is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
8Fuel Level Low
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8Gas Cap Loose
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
194 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Driving systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
TC shift conditionsnot fulfilledApply the brake/parking brake
The parking brake has not been applied and the brake pedal has notbeen depressed. The transfer case has canceled the gear changeprocess and is inNeutral. There is no connection between the engineand the drive wheels.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.X Make sure all conditions for changing gears are met (Y page 162).X Repeat the gearshift process.
TC malfunctionConsult workshopabout applying theparking brake
There is a malfunction in the transfer case.X Do not shift the transfer case.X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
TC shift canceledReactivate
The transfer case has not performed the gear change process.X Repeat the gearshift process.X Make sure all conditions for changing gears are met (Y page 162).
TC shift conditionsnot fulfilledMax. speed 25 mph
You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.X Repeat the gearshift process.
TC shift conditionsnot fulfilledSelect NEUTRAL gear
You have not met one or more shift conditions.X Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.X Repeat the gearshift process.
TC shift conditionsnot fulfilledMax. speed 40 mph
You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.X Repeat the gearshift process.
LOW RANGEON
The transfer case is in the LOW RANGE off-road position.
HIGH RANGEON
The transfer case is in the HIGH RANGE on-road position.
Differential lockonly available inLOW RANGEThe LOW RANGE button has been pressed. The transfer case is in theLOW RANGE off-road driving position and a differential lock isengaged.X Disengage the differential locks (Y page 164).X Repeat the gearshift process.
Display messages 195
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
TC NEUTRALON
The transfer case is in the Neutral neutral position.A warning tone will also sound when the driver's door is opened andthe brake pedal is not depressed.X Close the driver's door.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X Shift the transfer case according to driving conditions(Y page 162).
Preselected differ‐ential lockESP unavailable
A differential lock has been engaged. The differential gear has not yetlocked the respective differential. The activation indicator lamp (yel-low) (Y page 164) of the switch lights up.ESP is unavailable.ABS is still available.
Differential lockactiveABS and ESP unavail‐able
A differential lock was engaged and the differential gear has lockedthe respective differential. The activation indicator lamp (yellow) andfunction indicator lamp (red) (Y page 164) on the switch light up.ABS and ESP are unavailable.
Blind Spot Assistcurrently unavaila‐bleSee Operator's Man‐ual
Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Ryou have established the electrical connection between the trailerand your vehicle.Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.X When towing a trailer, confirm the display message witha.If you are driving without a trailer and the display message does notdisappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.X Clean the sensors (Y page 244).X Restart the engine.If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
Blind Spot AssistorInoperative
Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
196 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
DISTRONIC PLUSOff
DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 147).If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.
DISTRONIC PLUSNow Available
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarilyunavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 147).
DISTRONIC PLUSCurrently Unavaila‐ble. See Operator'sManual
DISTRONIC is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possible cau-ses are:Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator trim is dirtyRfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations orother sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe transfer case is in the LOW RANGE transmission position.Rthe vehicle is on an uphill or a downhill slope of more than22‑25%Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator trim and thebumper (Y page 244).
X Restart the engine.If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, the displaymessage disappears.DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.
DISTRONIC PLUSInoperative
DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.BAS (Brake Assist) may also have failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUSPassive
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph
An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 147).
DISTRONIC PLUS andSPEEDTRONICInoperative
DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tone alsosounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages 197
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Cruise control andSPEEDTRONIC Inoper‐ativeCruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Limit- - - mph
While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point(kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.
Cruise Control- - - mph
A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20mph (30 km/h), for example.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and storethe speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 141).
Tires
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Tire pressure willbe displayed afterdriving a fewminutes
The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure.X Drive on.The tire pressures appear in themultifunction display after you havebeen driving for a few minutes.
Tire Press. MonitorInoperative The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire Pressure Moni‐tor Inoperative NoWheel SensorsThe wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Thetire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving fora few minutes.
198 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the followinghazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 250).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 268).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning Tire Mal‐function The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 250).
Correct Tire Pres‐sure The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 268).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 270).
TirePress. Sen‐sor(s) Missing There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the mul-tifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-ist workshop.
Display messages 199
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
Tire Pressure Moni‐tor CurrentlyUnavailableDue to a source of radio interference, no signals can be received fromthe wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarily malfunc-tioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.
hTire Pressure Warn‐ing, Tire Malfunc‐tion
The tire pressure in one ormore tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheelposition is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-upand possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 250).
hCheck Tire Pressure
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of the followinghazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 250).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 268).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
hCorrect Tire Pres‐sure
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 268).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
200 Display messagesOn
-board
computerand
displays
Vehicle
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to P or N toStart Engine You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-tion R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.
Auxiliary BatteryMalfunction The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer beingcharged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before youswitch off the engine.
X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.
Apply Brake toShift from P You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.
A The rear door is open.
G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle inte-rior if the tailgate is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the rear door.
? The hood is open.
G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X Close the hood.
C At least one door is open.A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.
Display messages 201
On-board
computera
nddisplays
Z
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
DPower Steering Mal‐function. See Oper‐ator's Manual
The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.
G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.
Telephone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiverrange.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appearsin the multifunction display.
¥Check Washer Fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped belowthe minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 239).
SmartKey
Display messages Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
ÂKey Does Not Belongto Vehicle
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.
ÂTake Your Key fromIgnition
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.
ÂObtain a New Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster
Overview of warning and indicatorlamps
L Low-beam headlamps (Y page 84)#!
Turn signal (Y page 88)
K High-beam headlamps (Y page 88)R Rear fog lamp (Y page 86)ü Seat belts (Y page 204)$(USA)
Brakes (Y page 205)
J(Can-ada)
Brakes (yellow) (Y page 205)
202 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-board
computerand
displays
! ABS (Y page 206)÷ ESP® (Y page 207)å ESP® OFF (Y page 207)6 Restraint system (Y page 209); Check Engine (Y page 210)8 Reserve fuel (Y page 210)? Coolant (Y page 210)· Distance warning signal
(Y page 212)h Tire pressure monitor (Y page 213)
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 203
On-board
computera
nddisplays
Z
Safety
Seat belts
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
üAfter starting the engine,the red seat belt warninglamp lights up for six sec-onds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger tofasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 38).
üAfter starting the engine,the red seat belt warninglamp lights up. In addi-tion, a warning tonesounds for up to six sec-onds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 38).The warning tone ceases.
üThe red seat belt warninglamp lights up after theengine starts, as soon asthe driver's or the front-passenger door isclosed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 38).The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them ina secure place.The warning lamp goes out.
üThe red seat belt warninglamp flashes and anintermittent audiblewarning sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thevehicle is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 38).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven fasterthan 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them ina secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.
204 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-board
computerand
displays
Safety systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
$ (USA only)J (Canada only)USA only: the red brakesystem warning lamp islit while the engine isrunning. A warning tonealso sounds.Canada only: the yellowbrake system warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.
G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking charac-teristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
$ (USA only)J (Canada only)USA only: the red brakesystem warning lamp islit while the engine isrunning. A warning tonealso sounds.Canada only: the yellowbrake system warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunc-tion.
X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 205
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
!The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be mal-functioning.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmis-sion, will not be available.
!The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brakeforce distribution), the HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailerstabilization and the adaptive brake lights, for example, have alsobeen deactivated.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when the warn-ing lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
206 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-board
computerand
displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
!The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.
EBD ismalfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, ESP®, theHOLD function,hill start assist, adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilization, forexample, are also unavailable.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brakehard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
!The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.
You have engaged the differential locks. ABS is deactivated.X Disengage the differential locks.Subsequently ABS is reactivated.
$ (USA only)J (Canada only)÷ !The yellow brake warn-ing lamp, the yellowESP® warning lamp andthe yellow ABS warninglamp are lit while theengine is running.
ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. BAS, EBD, the HOLD function, hillstart assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailer stabilization, forexample, are therefore unavailable.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lockif you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 207
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
÷
The yellow ESP®warninglamp flashes while thevehicle is in motion.
ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.
X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 57).
å
The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.
ESP® is deactivated.
G WARNINGIf ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 57).
X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
÷ å
The yellow ESP® andESP®OFFwarning lampsare lit while the engine isrunning.
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brakelights and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunc-tion.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
208 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-board
computerand
displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
÷ å
The yellow ESP® andESP®OFFwarning lampsare lit while the engine isrunning.
ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer sta-bilization are temporarily unavailable.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steering move-ments at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when the warn-ing lamp goes out.
If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
å
The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.
The differential lock is engaged. ABS, ESP®, 4ETS and BAS have beendeactivated.X Disengage the differential lock.ESP®, 4ETS and BAS are subsequently reactivated.
X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
(Canada only)(USA only)The red parking brakewarning lamp comes onwhile the vehicle is mov-ing. A warning tone alsosounds.
You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake.The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
6The red restraint systemwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.
The restraint system is faulty.
G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devicesmay either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have the restraint system checked at a qualified specialist work-shop immediately.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page 34).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 209
On-board
computerand
displays
Z
Engine
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
;The yellow Check Enginewarning lamp lights upwhile the engine is run-ning.
There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be inemergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialistworkshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lightsup. This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. Ifin doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state inwhich you are currently driving.
8The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine is run-ning.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.In addition, the;Check Engine warninglamp may light up.
The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.
X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
?The red coolant warninglamp lights up while theengine is running and thecoolant temperaturegage is at the start of thescale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a riskof engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.
X Apply the parking brake.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
210 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-board
computerand
displays
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
?The red coolant warninglamp comes on while theengine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may beblocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled suffi-ciently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Apply the parking brake.X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until theengine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 238).
X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the enginecoolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain, and stop-start driving.
?The red coolant warninglamp comes on while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248‡ (120†). The airflow tothe engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be toolow.
G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catchfire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhichcan occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until theengine has cooled down.
X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 238).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 211
On-board
computera
nddisplays
Z
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM SolutionsX If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the enginecoolant system checked.
X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.
X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-tainous terrain, and stop-start driving.
Driving systems
Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions
·The red distancewarninglamp lights up while thevehicle is in motion.
The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected.X Increase the distance.
·The red distancewarninglamp lights up while thevehicle is in motion. Awarning tone alsosounds.
You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your line oftravel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brakeor take evasive action.
Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 147).
212 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn
-board
computera
nddisplays
Tires
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
h
USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunc-tion) is lit.Canada only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at leastone of the tires.
G WARNINGTire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may begreatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.
X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 130).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 250).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 268).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h
USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunc-tion) flashes for approx-imately one minute andthen remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pres-sure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction dis-play.
X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 213
On-board
computera
nddisplays
Z
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Loading guidelines
G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-den change in direction.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.
G WARNINGIf you distribute the load unevenly in the vehi-cle, the handling as well as the steering andbraking characteristics are severely affected.There is a risk of an accident.Distribute the load evenly in the vehicle.Secure the load to prevent it from slipping.
G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim canbecome very hot. If you come into contactwith these parts of the vehicle, you could burnyourself. There is a risk of injury.Always be particularly careful around theexhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allowthese components to cool down before touch-ing them.
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the reardoor is open when the engine is running, par-ticularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passenger compart-ment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the reardoor. Never drive with the rear door open.
Driving, braking and steering characteristicschange depending on:Rtype of loadRweightRthe center of gravity of the loadYou should therefore load your vehicle as shownin the illustrations.The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicleweight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, sparewheel, accessories installed, vehicle occupantsand luggage/load.Do not exceed the load limit or permitted grossvehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle.The gross load limit and the GVWR are specifiedon the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillarof the driver's door (Y page 288).Furthermore, the load must be distributed insuch a way that the weight on each axle neverexceeds the gross axle weight rating (GAWR) forthe front and rear axles. The specifications forGVWR and GAWR are on the vehicle identifica-tion plate on the B-pillar of the driver's door(Y page 288).Further information can be found in the "Loadingthe vehicle" section (Y page 271).
214 Loading guidelinesStow
ageandfeatures
Observe the following notes when transportinga load:RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as pos-sible and as low down in the cargo compart-ment as possible.
i Transport loads when possible in the cargocompartment. You should only use the cargocompartment enlargement if the load doesnot fit in the cargo compartment.RAlways place the load against the backrests ofthe front seats or rear seats.RUse the cargo tie-down rings and the parcelnets to transport loads and luggage.RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-rials appropriate for the weight and size of theload.
If the rear bench seat is not occupied:X Insert the belt tongue on the outer seat beltsinto the buckle of opposite seat belt:.
X Secure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie downs.
X Pad sharp edges for protection.
Stowage areas
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf objects in the passenger compartment arestowed incorrectly, they can slide or bethrown around and hit vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, particularly in theevent of sudden braking or a sudden changein direction.
RAlways stow objects so that they cannot bethrown around in such situations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets orstowage nets.RClose the lockable stowage spaces whiledriving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the cargo compartment.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 214).
Stowage compartments in the front
Glove box
X To open: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.
X To close: fold glove box flap; upwards untilit engages.
1 Glove box unlocked2 Glove box locked
Stowage areas 215
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock (Y page 61) and turn it 90° clockwise toposition2.
X To unlock: insert the mechanical key into thelock (Y page 61) and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to position1.
i The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.
Door stowage compartmentThere is an additional compartment located onthe driver's door paneling, which can be used tostore a mini tablet PC, for example.
Stowage compartment/telephone com-partment under the armrest/in the centerconsole
: Small stowage compartment; Release button for the armrestStowage compartment/telephone compart-ment under the armrestX To open: press release button;.X Fold up armrest.i In the stowage compartment, there is astowage tray.
X To close: fold the armrest down.The armrest engages audibly.
Stowage space in the rear
Storage pocketsG WARNINGStorage bags are intended for storing light-weight items only.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges orfragile objects may not be transported in the
storage bag. In an accident, during hard brak-ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Storage bags cannot protect transportedgoods in the event of an accident.
The stowage pockets are located on the rearside of the front seats.
Stowage netsThe stowage net is in the front-passenger foot-well.Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 214)and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces(Y page 215).
Cargo compartment enlargement
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intendedlevel of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-partment cannot be restrained by the seatbackrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the reardoor is open when the engine is running, par-ticularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust
216 Stowage areasStow
ageandfeatures
fumes could enter the passenger compart-ment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the reardoor. Never drive with the rear door open.
! Ensure that you remove all containers fromthe cup holder in the rear before folding theseat backrest and the seat cushion of the rearbench seat forwards.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 214).The rear bench seat is split symmetrically.The left-hand and right-hand rear bench seatscan be folded forward to increase the capacityof the rear compartment. The following changesare possible:Rfold the seat backrests forwardRfold the rear bench seat back fully
Folding the seat backrest forward
To fold forward the seat backrests, proceed asfollows:X Open the rear doors.This allows you better access to releaselever:.
X Remove the center head restraint(Y page 75).
X Pull catch: in the direction of the arrow.The corresponding rear seat backrest is notengaged.
X Fold the backrest forwards.The rear seat backrest engages audibly.
; Backrest folded forward
Folding the seat backrest back! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-aged.
X Pull release lever:.The corresponding seat backrest is released.
X Fold backrest; backwards in the directionof the arrow.The seat catch engages audibly.
X Install the head restraint (Y page 75).
Stowage areas 217
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
Rear bench seat
Folding the rear bench seat forward
X Fold rear seat backrest (Y page 217) for-wards.
X Pull catch: in the direction of the arrow.The corresponding rear bench seat isreleased.
X Fold rear bench seat; forwards.
; Rear bench seat folded forward
Folding the rear bench seat into anupright positionG WARNINGIf the rear bench seat/rear seat and seatbackrest are not engaged they could fold for-wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in theevent of an accident.RThe vehicle occupant would thereby bepushed into the seat belt by the rear benchseat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. Theseat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even causeinjuries.RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo com-partment cannot be restrained by the seatbackrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.Before every trip, make sure that the seatbackrests and the rear bench seat/rear seatare engaged.
X Fold the rear bench seat back.The seat catch engages audibly.
X Fold the backrest backwards (Y page 217).X Install the head restraints (Y page 75).
Securing cargo
Important safety notesDistribute the load on the cargo tie-down ringsevenly.Do not tamper with or repair cargo tie-downpoints, cargo tie-down rings or tie downs. Havemaintenance work as well as modifications,installations and conversions carried out at aqualified specialist workshop (Y page 23).Observe the following notes on securing loads:RSecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure aload, as these are only intended as an anti-slipprotection for light loads.RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges orcorners.RPad sharp edges for protection.ROnly use tie downs that have been checked inaccordance with applicable standards, e.g.lashing nets or lashing straps.RFill the spaces between the load and thecargo compartment walls and the wheelhousing in a form-locking way. Only usedimensionally stable transportation aids forthis, such as chocks, wooden fixings or pad-ding.
218 Stowage areasStow
ageandfeatures
Cargo tie-down rings in the cargo com-partment
There are four cargo tie-down rings: in thecargo compartment mounted at the sides.
Cargo compartment cover
Important safety notes
G WARNINGOn its own, the cargo compartment covercannot secure or restrain heavy objects,items of luggage and heavy loads. You couldbe hit by an unsecured load during suddenchanges in direction, braking or in the event ofan accident. There is an increased risk ofinjury or even fatal injury.Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. byusing tie downs, even if you are using thecargo compartment cover.
! When loading the vehicle, make sure thatyou do not stack the load in the cargo com-partment higher than the lower edge of theside windows. Do not place heavy objects ontop of the cargo compartment cover.
The cargo compartment cover is located behindthe rear bench seat backrest.
Opening and closing the cargo compart-ment cover
X To open: pull cargo compartment cover:back and clip it into the retainers on the leftand right of the rear door.
X To close: unclip cargo compartment cover:and guide it forwards until it is completely rol-led up.
Installing/removing the cargo compart-ment cover
X To remove: make sure that cargo compart-ment cover; is rolled up.
X Slide catches: on the left-hand and right-hand sides of cargo compartment cover;towards the center of the vehicle.
X Swing cargo compartment cover; up andout.
X To install: slide catches: towards the cen-ter of the vehicle.
X Insert cargo compartment cover; into therecesses in the side trim.
Stowage areas 219
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
X Push down the right-hand and left-hand sidesof cargo compartment cover; until itengages.
X Slide catches: in the direction of the sidetrim.
Roof carrier
G WARNINGWhen you load the roof, the center of gravityof the vehicle rises and the driving character-istics change. If you exceed themaximum roofload, the driving characteristics, as well assteering and braking, will be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.Never exceed the maximum roof load andadjust your driving style.
The roof is not suited for transporting loads. Donot use the roof rails or other accessories whichare mounted on the roof.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you transport objects in the vehicle interiorand these are not adequately secured, theycould slip or be flung around and therebystrike vehicle occupants. In addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces and mobilephone brackets may not always be able tohold the objects placed in them in the event ofan accident. There is a risk of injury, particu-larly in the event of sharp braking or suddenchanges of direction.RAlways stow objects in such a way that theycannot be tossed about in these or similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do not pro-trude out of the stowage spaces, luggagenets or stowage nets.
REnsure that closable stowage spaces areshut before beginning your journey.RAlways stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects inthe cargo compartment.
! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. The drinkscould otherwise spill.
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 214).
Cup holder on the center console
X Fold cup holder: all the way up.
Cup holders in the rear compartment! Ensure that you remove all containers fromthe cup holder in the rear before folding theseat backrest and the seat cushion of the rearbench seat forwards.
: Cup holder
220 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
Sun visors
Overview
G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.
: Sun visor; Bracket= Mirror cover? Mirror light
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
: Sun visor; Bracket= Mirror cover? Mirror lightMirror lights? will only function if sun visor:is clipped into bracket;.
X Fold down sun visor:.X Fold up mirror cover=.Mirror lights? are switched on automati-cally.
Glare from the side
: Sun visor; Bracket= Mirror cover? Mirror lightX Fold down sun visor:.X Pull sun visor: from bracket;.X Swing sun visor: to the side.
Stowage compartment/ashtray
Stowage compartment/ashtray in thecenter console
G WARNINGIf you engage transmission position D whenremoving the ashtray insert, the vehicle canroll away. There is a risk of an accident.Always switch off the engine first and safe-guard the vehicle against rolling away byapplying the parking brake.
Features 221
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
: Cover; Inserti On new vehicles, insert; is stored in theglove box. Install the insert before using theashtray.
X To open: press cover: and then release it.The ashtray opens.
X To remove the insert: make sure that theengine is switched off and that the parkingbrake has been applied to secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.
X Move the selector lever to N.X Press down cover:.Insert; is released.
X Pull insert; upwards and remove it.X To install the insert: install insert; fromabove.
X Push insert; down.Insert; audibly engages.
X To close: close cover: fully.
i The ashtray is lit up if the low-beam head-lamps are on.
Ashtray in the rear compartment
X To open: fold cover; out in the direction ofthe arrow.
X To remove the insert: press retaining lug:and pull insert= upwards and out.
X To install the insert: install insert= fromabove.
X To close: close cover; fully.
Cigarette lighter
G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.
! The 12 V socket in the cigarette lighter canbe used for accessories (up to a maximum of180 W), as long as they have the standardsocket type for cigarette lighters.Note that the socket in the cigarette lightercan be damaged when connecting accesso-ries, for example by:Rfrequent insertion and removalRsockets that do not fit correctlyA damaged socket can cause the cigarettelighter to stop working.
222 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
X Press in cigarette lighter:.Cigarette lighter:will pop out automaticallywhen the heating element is red-hot.
12 V sockets
General notes! If you are simultaneously using all threesockets in the vehicle, make sure that you donot exceed the maximum current draw of45 A. Otherwise, you will overload the fuses.
The sockets can be used for accessories with amaximum current draw of 180 W (15 A) each,e.g. bulbs or chargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods when theengine is switched off, the battery may dis-charge.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock.
Socket in the front-passenger footwell
X Lift up the cover of the socket.i The cigarette lighter socket can be also used(Y page 222). This is the case even if theSmartKey has been removed from the ignitionlock.
Socket in the rear compartment
The socket is located on the center console inthe rear compartment.X Lift up the cover of the socket.
Socket in the cargo compartment
The socket is located in the cargo compartmenton the left-hand side, when viewed in the direc-tion of travel, next to the rear door.X Lift up the cover of the socket.
115 V socket
G WARNINGThe 115 V AC power socket operates on highvoltage. Use the 115 VACpower socket in thevehicle with the same caution and care thatyou would take with power sockets at home.Keep fluids away from the 115 V AC powersocket. Do not use liquids or sharp tools toclean the power socket. Keep the cover of the115 V AC power socket closed when not inuse. Otherwise, you could suffer an electricshock and be seriously or even fatally injured.
Features 223
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
G WARNINGAny device that you connect must have a suit-able plug and meet U.S. standards. Never pullat a cable to disconnect a plug from a 115 VAC power socket. Never use a damaged con-nection cable. The 115 V AC power socketmust never be connected to another 115VACpower source. Do not use a converter with anearthed plug for the 115 V AC power socket.This could cause serious injury to you and/orother people.
G WARNINGIf the 115 V AC power socket is damaged orpulled out of the trim, do not use or touch the115VAC power socket. The use of a 115 VACpower socket that has been damaged orpulled out of the trim could cause seriousinjury to you or others.
115 V power socket: provides an AC voltageof 115 V so that small electronic devices can beconnected. These devices, such as games con-soles, chargers and laptops, should not con-sume more than a maximum of 150 W alto-gether.Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment andthe cargo compartment are operational(Y page 223).Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedinto 115 V power socket:.Rthe on-board power supply is within a permis-sible voltage range.Rthe electronic device's maximum power out-put does not exceed 150 W.
X Open flap=.X Switch on the ignition.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If indicator lamp; does not light up, pleaseread the section on malfunctions.
X To turn off: disconnect the plug from 115 Vpower socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.
X Close flap=.Possible causes of malfunctions:Rthe on-board power supply is not within a per-missible voltage range.Rthe temperature of the DC/AC converter istemporarily too high.Rsome small electronic devices have a con-stant nominal power of less than 150W, but avery high switch-on current. In that case,there is a possibility that these devices willnot function properly as 115 V socket: isnot able to provide a high enough current.
X If indicator lamp; still does not light up,contact a qualified specialist workshop.
mbrace
Important safety notes! You must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Ensure that yoursystem is activated and ready for use, andpress theEMB Info call button to register.If one of these steps is not carried out, it maynot be possible to activate the system.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA: Response Center at1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367
USA only: shortly after successfully registeringwith the mbrace service a user ID and passwordwill be sent to you by post. You can use thispassword to log onto the mbrace area under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
224 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
The mbrace system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operational. Acti-vation requires an availablemobile phone net-work, a valid SIM card and a subscription to asecurity service.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe corresponding mobile phone network isavailable for transmitting data to the Cus-tomer Center.
i Determining the location of the vehicle on amap is only possible if there is sufficient GPSreception and the vehicle position can be for-warded to the Customer Center.
The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during anmbrace call, pro-ceed as follows:X Press theW orX button on the multi-function steering wheel.
orX Use the COMAND volume control.The mbrace system provides three differentservices:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find more information and adescription of all available features under "Own-ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
G WARNINGA malfunction in the system has been detec-ted if one of the following conditions occurs:Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot light up during the system self-diagno-sis.Rthe indicator lamp in theº RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringthe system self-diagnosis.Rthe indicator lamp in the E informationbutton does not light up during the systemself-diagnosis.Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button,ºRoadside Assistance button or E infor-
mation button continues to be lit red afterthe system self-diagnosis.Rthe Tele Aid inoperative or Tele Aidnot activated message appears on themultifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.
If amalfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. Inthe event of an emergency, assistance mustbe summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA: Response Center at1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367
After you have switched on the ignition, the sys-tem carries out a self-diagnosis.
Emergency call
Important safety notesG WARNINGIf the indicator lamp in the SOS button isflashing continuously and there was no voiceconnection to the Response Center estab-lished, then the mbrace system could not ini-tiate an emergency call (e.g. the relevant cel-lular phone network is not available).The message Call Failed appears in themultifunction display for approximately10 seconds.Should this occur, assistance must be sum-moned by other means.
! You must have a license agreement to acti-vate the mbrace service. Ensure that yoursystem is activated and ready for use, andpress theEMB Info call button to register.If one of these steps is not carried out, it maynot be possible to activate the system.
Features 225
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephone hot-lines:RUSA: Response Center at1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367
An emergency call is dialed automatically if anair bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-gered.
i An automatically dialed mbrace emergencycall cannot be canceled.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-ually.As soon as the emergency call has been initi-ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears on the multifunction display.COMAND is muted.Once the connection has been made, the CallConnected message appears in the multifunc-tion display.All important information on the emergency isprovided, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (as determinedby the GPS system)Rvehicle modelRvehicle colorRvehicle identification numberA short time after the emergency call is initiated,a voice connection is automatically establishedbetween the Response Center and the vehicleoccupants. If the vehicle occupants are able torespond, the Response Center will attempt toobtain more detailed information on the emer-gency.
i If there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediately sentto the vehicle.
Making an emergency callG WARNINGIf you feel at any way in jeopardy when in thevehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, vehi-cle in a dangerous road location), please donot wait for voice contact after you havepressed the SOS button. Carefully leave thevehicle and move to a safe location. The
Response Center will automatically contactlocal emergency officials with the vehicle'sapproximate location if they receive an auto-matic SOS signal and cannot make voice con-tact with the vehicle occupants.
X To initiate an emergency call manually:press cover: briefly to open.
X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button; flashesuntil the emergency call is concluded.
X Wait for the voice connection with theResponse Center.
X After the emergency call, close cover:.
Roadside Assistance button
X Open the stowage compartment under thearmrest (Y page 216).
X Press Roadside Assistance button: formore than two seconds.A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assis-tance Representative is initiated. Indicatorlamp; in Roadside Assistance button:flashes while the call is active. The Connect‐ing Callmessage appears in the multifunc-tion display and COMAND is muted.
226 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network is available and thereis sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace systemtransmits data to the Response Center, forexample:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberRvehicle modelRvehicle color
i The COMAND display shows that anmbracecall is active. You can change to the naviga-tion menu by pressing the NAVI button onCOMAND during the call. Voice output is notavailable.
A voice connection is established between theMercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Represen-tative and the vehicle occupants.The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Rep-resentative either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may becharged for services such as repair work and/ortowing. Further details are available in yourmbrace manual.X Describe the type of assistance needed.i If the indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: is flashing continuously and novoice connection with the Response centerhas been established, then the mbrace sys-tem has not been able to initiate a RoadsideAssistance call (e.g. the relevant mobilephone network is not available). The CallFailedmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.
X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.
orX Press the corresponding COMAND button toend a phone call.
i Sign and drive services1: you are notcharged for services such as jump-starting,providing a few gallons of fuel for a fuel tankthat has been run dry or changing a faulty tirewith the vehicle's own spare wheel.
MB Info call button
X Open the stowage compartment under thearmrest (Y page 216).
X Press Roadside Assistance button: formore than two seconds.A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assis-tance Representative is initiated. Indicatorlamp; in Roadside Assistance button:flashes while the call is active. The Connect‐ing Callmessage appears in the multifunc-tion display and COMAND is muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐nected message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If a mobile phone network is available and thereis sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace systemtransmits data to the Response Center, forexample:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification numberRvehicle modelRvehicle color
i The COMAND display shows that anmbracecall is active. You can change to the naviga-tion menu by pressing the NAVI button onCOMAND during the call. Voice output is notavailable.
A voice connection between the Response Cen-ter and the vehicle occupants is established.You can obtain information on how to operateyour vehicle's systems, on the location of thenearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, andon further products and services offered byMercedes-Benz USA.
1 USA only.
Features 227
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
You can find further information on the mbracesystem at http://www.mbusa.com2 Log inunder "Owners Online".
i If the indicator lamp in MB Info call but-ton: is flashing continuously and no voiceconnection with the Response center hasbeen established, then the mbrace systemhas not been able to initiate an MB Info call(e.g. the relevantmobile phone network is notavailable). The Call Failed messageappears in the multifunction display.
X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.
orX Press the corresponding COMAND button toend a phone call.
Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergency callcan still be initiated. In this case, an emergencycall will take priority and override all other activecalls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended. An emergency callcan only be terminated by the Response Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing the~ button on themultifunction steeringwheelor the corresponding COMAND button for end-ing a telephone call.
i When an mbrace call is initiated, COMANDis muted. The mobile phone is no longer con-nected to COMAND.However, if you want to use your mobilephone, do so only when the vehicle is station-ary and in a safe location.
Downloading destinations in COMANDDestination Download gives you access to adatabase with over ten million points of interest(POIs) which can be downloaded onto the navi-gation system of your vehicle. If you know thedestination, you can download the address orobtain the location of points of interest (POIs) orimportant destinations in the surrounding area.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance tothe address entered.i For information on the components andoperating principles of COMAND, (see theseparate operating instructions).
X Select Yes using the= or; buttons onCOMAND.
X Confirm using the 9 button on COMAND.The system calculates the route and subse-quently starts the route guidance with theaddress entered.
i If you select No, the address can be stored inthe address book.
i The Destination Download function is avail-able if the corresponding mobile phone net-work is available and data transfer is possible.
Search & Send"Search & Send" is a destination entry service.For more information on "Search & Send", seethe separate operating instructions.
Vehicle remote openingIf you have unintentionally locked your vehicle(e.g. the SmartKey is inside the vehicle) and areplacement key is not available:X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Response Center at1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time arrangedwith the Response Center.
X Press the release button on the door handle ofthe rear door for at least 20 seconds until theindicator lamp in the SOSbutton (Y page 225)flashes.The Connecting Call message appears onthe multifunction display.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via theInternet in the "Owner's Online" section usingyour identification number and password3.
2 USA only.3 USA only.
228 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone network isaccessible.The SOS button flashes and the ConnectingCall message appears in the multifunctiondisplay to confirm that the command for vehi-cle remote unlocking has been received.If the lock cylinder on the rear door is pressedfor longer than 20 seconds before receivingauthorization for remote unlocking from theResponse center, you must wait 15 minutesbefore you can press the lock cylinder on therear door again.
Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby. The vehicle can then belocked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-tance Center.The vehicle can be remotely locked within fourdays of the ignition being turned off.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your PIN.The next time you are inside the vehicle and youswitch on the ignition, the Tele Aid DoorsLocked Remotelymessage appears in themul-tifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-tionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)
To do this, you will need your identification num-ber and password.
i The vehicle remote closing feature is avail-able when the relevant mobile phone networkis available and data connection is possible.
Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Contact the police.The police will issue an incident report. Thisreport has a number.
X Forward this number to the Response Centertogether with your PIN.The Response Center will then attempt tocovertly contact the mbrace system. TheResponse Center contacts you and the locallaw enforcement authority if the vehicle islocated. However, only the law enforcementagency is informed of the location of the vehi-cle.
i If the anti-theft alarm system is active forlonger than 30 seconds, mbrace is automati-cally connected with the Customer Assis-tance center.
Vehicle Health CheckWith the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis(Vehicle Health Check), the Customer Assis-tance center can provide improved support forproblems with your vehicle. During an existingcall, vehicle data is transferred to the CustomerAssistance center. The customer service repre-sentative can use the received data to decidewhat kind of assistance is required. You arethen, for example, guided to the nearestMercedes-Benz Service center or a recoveryvehicle is called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred during anMB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this isinitiated by the Customer Assistance center.You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐nectedmessage in the COMAND display. If thevehicle remote malfunction diagnosis is able tobe started, the Request for vehicle diag‐nosis received. Start vehicle diagno‐sis? message appears in the display.X Press Yes to confirm the message.X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please startignition message appears: turn the Smart-Key to position 2 in the ignition lock.
X If the Please follow the instructionsreceived by phone and move your vehi‐cle into a safe position messageappears: follow the instructions of the cus-tomer service representative.The message in the display disappears.
Features 229
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote mal-function diagnosis is canceled completely.The vehicle operating state check begins.Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis acti‐vated message appears.
When the check is finished, the Sending vehi‐cle diagnosis data... (Voice connec‐tion may be interrupted during datatransfer) message appears. The vehicle datacan now be sent to the Customer Assistancecenter.X Press OK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnosis: Transferringdata... message appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.
Depending on what the customer service rep-resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-tion is re-established after the transfer is com-plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at alater time by another means, e.g. by e-mail orphone.Further functions of the vehicle remote mal-function diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance center. If a service is overdue, theCOMAND display shows a message aboutvarious special offers at your workshop.Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil level,air pressure, maintenance, brakes, etc. Ifapplicable, you will receive information onspecial offers in the e-mail.USA only: this information can also be calledup under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 24).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 21).
Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transfer andsave predefined routes in the navigation sys-tem. To do this, an SD memory card must beinserted into the COMAND system. If no SDmemory card is inserted, you must insert thecard into the card slot on the COMAND systembefore saving.
A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet. Each route caninclude up to 20 way points. When a route hasbeen received by the navigation system, the'Route name' has been saved to memorycard. Do you want to start route guid‐ance? message appears on the COMAND dis-play. The route is saved to the SD memory card.X To start route guidance: select Yes.An overview of the route is shown in the dis-play.i If you select No, the saved route can becalled up later in the navigation menu.
X Select Start.Route guidance is started.
i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND. Further information canbe found in the "COMAND", "Online and Inter-net services" and "Download destination/route" sections.
Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle. If thisselected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, amessage will be sent to the Customer Assis-tance center. The Customer Assistance centerthen forwards this information to you. You canselect the way in which you receive this infor-mation beforehand. Possible options includetext message, e-mail or an automated call.The data which is sent to the Customer Assis-tance center contains the following information:Rthe location where the speed limit was excee-dedRthe time at which the speed limit was excee-dedRthe selected speed limit which was exceeded
Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areaswhich thevehicle should not enter or leave. You will beinformed if the vehicle crosses the boundariesof the selected areas. You can select the way inwhich you receive this information beforehand.Possible options include textmessage, e-mail oran automated call.The area can be determined as either a circle ora polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You
230 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-ferent settings are possible for each area.USA only: these settings can be called up under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger anMB Info call andinform the customer service representative thatyou wish to activate geo fencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated by textmessage.
Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger the vehicle'spanic alarm via text message. An alarm soundsand the exterior lighting flashes. Depending onthe setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.
Brush guard (USA only)If the brush guard has to be removed, contact aqualified specialist workshop.
Garage door opener
General notesYou can use the HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated into the rear-view mirror to operateup to three different gate/garage door openersystems.
i Certain garage door drives are incompatiblewith the integrated garage door opener. If youhave difficulty programing the integratedgarage door opener, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You can also contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100
i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.
i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 of Indus-try Canada. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener, per-sons in the range of movement of the garagedoor can become trapped or struck by thegarage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.
G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaces with-out sufficient ventilation.
When programming a garage door opener, parkthe vehicle outside the garage. Do not run theengine while programming.
Programming the remote control
ProgrammingPay attention to the "Important safety notes"(Y page 231).
Features 231
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage
door remote controlGarage door remote controlA is not part of thegarage door opener.i To achieve the best result, insert new bat-teries in garage door remote controlA ofyour garage door drive before programming.
X Delete the memory of the integrated remotecontrol (Y page 234) before programming itfor the first time.
X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X Press and hold transmitter button;,=or?.After a short time, indicator lamp: will startflashing. It flashes approximately once persecond.i Indicator lamp: flashes immediately thefirst time that the transmitter button is pro-grammed. If this transmitter button hasalready been programmed, indicator lamp:will only start flashing at a rate of once a sec-ond after 20 seconds have elapsed.
X Continue to hold the transmitter button.X Point transmitter buttonB of garage doorremote controlA towards the transmitterbuttons on the rear-view mirror at a distanceof 2 to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm).i The distance between garage door remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the system of the garagedoor drive. Several attempts might be neces-sary. You should test every position for atleast 20 seconds before trying another posi-tion.
X Keep transmitter buttonB on garage doorremote controlA pressed until indicatorlamp: starts to flash rapidly.The programming has been successful if indi-cator lamp: flashes rapidly.
X Release transmitter buttons;,= or? onthe integrated remote control and transmitterbuttonB on the garage door remote control.
If indicator lamp: goes out after approx-imately 20 seconds and has not flashed rapidly:X Release transmitter buttons;,= or? onthe integrated remote control and transmitterbuttonB on the garage door remote control.
X Repeat the procedure for the other transmit-ter buttons. When doing so, vary the distancebetween the garage door's remote controland the transmitter buttons in the rear-viewmirror.i If the garage door system works with a roll-ing code, you must synchronize the remotecontrol integrated in the rear-viewmirror withthe garage door system receiver after pro-gramming.You will find further information in the garagedoor opening system's operating instruc-tions, e.g. the sections on "Synchronizing thetransmitter" or "Registering a new transmit-ter". You can also call the hotline mentionedabove.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage
door remote controlYour vehicle must be within reach of the garagedoor or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-
232 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects arepresent within the sweep of the door or gate.Observe the safety notes when performing therolling code synchronization (Y page 231).X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X Press the programming button of the door orgate drive (see the door or gate drive operat-ing instructions, e.g. under "Programmingadditional remote controls").i You nowhave 30 seconds to initiate the nextstep.
X Press previously programmed button;,=or? on the integrated garage door openeruntil the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is then com-plete.
Notes on programming the remote con-trolCanadian radio frequency laws require a "break"(or interruption) of the transmission signalsafter broadcasting for a few seconds. Therefore,these signals may not last long enough for theintegrated remote control to recognize the sig-nal during programming. Comparable withCanadian law, American garage door openersalso have a built-in "interruption".If you live in Canada or have difficulties pro-gramming the garage door opener (regardless ofwhere you live) when using the programmingsteps, proceed as follows:
Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage
door remote control
X Keep the transmitter button (;,= or?)depressed until the integrated remote controlhas been set up successfully.
X Simultaneously press transmitter buttonBon the garage door remote control and holdfor 2 seconds. Then let go for 2 seconds,press again and hold for 2 seconds.
X Repeat this sequence on transmitter buttonB of the garage door remote control until thefrequency signal has been saved.
X If the setup procedure is successful, indicatorlamp: flashes once slowly and goes outafter a few seconds.
X Continue with the other programming steps(see above).
Problems when programming
Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage
door remote controlIf you have problems when programming theintegrated remote control, please note the fol-lowing:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garagedoor remote controlA (which can usually befound on the back of the remote control).The integrated remote control is compatiblewith devices that have units which operate inthe frequency range of 280 to 390 MHz.Rreplace the batteries in garage door remotecontrolA. This increases the probability ofgarage door remote controlA sending astrong and precise signal to the integratedremote control on the rear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold garage door remotecontrolA at varying distances and angles
Features 233
Stow
ageandfeatures
Z
from the transmitter button which you areprogramming. Try various angles at a distancebetween2 and12 inches (5 to 30 cm) or at thesame angle but at varying distances.RIf there is another garage door remote controlfor the same device, perform the program-ming steps again using that garage dooropener. Before performing these steps, makesure that new batteries have been installed inthe garage door remote control.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signal trans-mission.
Opening/closing the garage door
: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage
door remote controlOnce programmed, the integrated remote con-trol will assume the function of the garage doorsystem's remote control. Please also read theoperating instructions for the garage door sys-tem.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 112)in the ignition lock.
X Press transmitter button;,= or? on theintegrated remote control in the rear-viewmirror that is programmed to operate thegarage door.Garage door systemwith fixed code: indicatorlamp: lights up continuously.Garage door system with rolling code: indica-tor lamp: flashes briefly and then lights upfor approximately two seconds. This is repea-ted for up to 20 seconds.i The transmitter will transmit a signal for aslong as the transmitter button is being
pressed. The transmission will be halted aftera maximum of 20 seconds and indicatorlamp: will flash. Press the transmitter but-ton again, if necessary.
Clearing the remote control memory
: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage
door remote controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 112)in the ignition lock.
X Press and hold transmitter buttons; and?for approximately 20 seconds until indicatorlamp: flashes rapidly.The memory is cleared.
i Make sure that you clear the remote controlmemory before selling the vehicle.
234 FeaturesStow
ageandfeatures
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment may be very hot, e.g. the drive systemand radiator. Working in the engine compart-ment poses a risk of injury.If possible, let the drive system cool down andonly touch the components described in thefollowing.
G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine is over-heated or when there is a fire in the enginecompartment could expose you to hot gasesor other service products. There is a risk ofinjury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.
G WARNINGThe ignition system and the fuel injection sys-tem work under high voltage. If you touchcomponents which are under voltage, youcould get an electric shock. There is a risk ofinjury.Never touch components of the ignition sys-tem or fuel injection system when the ignitionis switched on.
G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment:Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRremove jewelry and watchesRkeep items of clothing and hair, for exam-ple, away from moving parts
G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set inmotion, you can be injured bythe wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.
! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshield wip-ers or the hood.
Do not touch the following when the ignition isswitched on:Rignition coilsRspark plug connectorsRtest socket
Engine compartment 235
Maintenance
andcare
Z
Opening the hood
The release lever on the hood is in the footwellon the left-hand side of the vehicle when viewedin the direction of travel.X Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off.
X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.
X Lift the hood slightly.X Push the handle of hood catch; in the direc-tion of the arrow and lift the hood.
Closing the hood
G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving. Beforeevery trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height ofapproximately 8 inches (20 cm).
X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and close itwith a little more force.
Engine oil
General notesDepending on your driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per600 miles (1000 km). The oil consumption maybe higher than this when the vehicle is new or ifyou frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-stick
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.
Example: oil dipstickOn the G 63 AMG, the oil level can be checkedusing the oil dipstick.
236 Engine compartmentMaintenance
andcare
When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-imately five minutes if the engine is at normaloperating temperature.Rthe engine should be switched off for at least30 minutes if the engine is not at operatingtemperature, e.g. if you only start the enginebriefly.
X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.
X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guide tubeto the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= and MAXmark;, the oil level is correct.
X Add oil if necessary.On all other models, the on-board computermust be used to check the engine oil level.
Checking the oil level using the on-board computer! Do not add too much oil. adding too muchengine oil can result in damage to the engineor to the catalytic converter. Have excessengine oil siphoned off.
G 550: the oil level can only be checked usingthe on-board computer.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for approx-imately five minutes if the engine is at normaloperating temperature.
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock.
X Press the9 or: button on the steeringwheel to select the following message:
The measurement takes a few seconds. You willsee one of the following messages in the multi-function display:REngine Oil Level OKRAdd 1.0 qt (Canada: 1.0 liter) to reachmaximum oil levelRAdd 1.5 qts (Canada: 1.5 liters) toreach maximum oil levelRAdd 2.0 qts. (Canada: 2.0 liters) toreach maximum oil levelX Add oil if necessary.If the engine is at normal operating temperatureand the Engine oil Reduce oil level dis-play appears, too much oil has been added.X Have excess oil siphoned off.If the Switch ignition on to checkengine oil level message appears:X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
If the Observe waiting time messageappears:X If the engine is at normal operating tem-perature: repeat the measurement afterapproximately five minutes.
X If the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature: e.g. if the engine was only star-ted briefly, repeat the measurement afterapproximately 30 minutes.
If the Engine oil level Not when engineon message appears:X Switch off the engine.X If the engine is at normal operating tem-perature: wait about five minutes before car-rying out the measurement.
X If the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature: e.g. if the engine was only star-ted briefly, wait approximately 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.
i If you wish to cancel the measurement,press the9 or: button on the multi-function steering wheel.
Adding engine oil
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Engine compartment 237
Maintenance
andcare
Z
Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.
G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next tothe filler neck. Let the engine cool down andthoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-ponents before starting the engine.
H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful tothe environment.
! Only use engine oils and oil filters that havebeen approved for vehicles with a service sys-tem. You can obtain a list of the engine oilsand oil filters tested and approved in accord-ance with the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products at any Mercedes-BenzService center.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have notbeen specifically approved for the servicesystemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters after theinterval for replacement specified by theservice system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.
! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalytic con-verter. Have excess oil siphoned off.
Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and remove it.X Add the amount of oil required.Observe the specifications in the on-board com-puter when doing so or fill carefully to the max-imum mark on the oil dipstick.Further information on engine oil (Y page 292).i The difference between the minimum markand the maximum mark on the oil dipstick isapproximately 2.1 US qt (2 l).
X Replace cap: on the filler neck and tightenclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
Additional service products
Checking coolant level
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.
G WARNINGThe cooling system is pressurized, particularlywhen the motor is warm. If you open the cap,you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.There is a risk of injury.
238 Engine compartmentMaintenance
andcare
Let the engine cool down before you open thecap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowlyopen the cap to relieve pressure.
X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.
X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 112)in the ignition lock.
X Check the coolant temperature display in theinstrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).
X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clock-wise and allow excess pressure to escape.
X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar=in the filler neck when cold, there is enoughcoolant in coolant expansion tank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) abovemarker bar= in the filler neckwhen warm, there is enough coolant in cool-ant expansion tank;.
X If necessary, add coolant that has been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as far asit will go.
For further information on coolant, see(Y page 294).
Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem
G WARNINGCertain components in the engine compart-ment, such as the engine, radiator and partsof the exhaust system, can become very hot.Working in the engine compartment poses arisk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.
G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
Example: washer fluid reservoirX To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.
On vehicles with the headlamp cleaning system,the recommendedminimumwasher fluid level is0.92 US gal (3.5 liters). On vehicles without theheadlamp cleaning system, the recommendedminimum washer fluid level is 0.26 US gal(1 liter). If the washer fluid level drops below therecommended minimum fluid level of0.26 US gal (1 liter), a message appears in themultifunction display prompting you to addwasher fluid (Y page 202).
Engine compartment 239
Maintenance
andcare
Z
Further information on windshield washer fluid/antifreeze (Y page 295).
Brake fluid level! If you notice that the brake fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir has fallen to the MINmark or less, check the brake system imme-diately for leaks. Also check the thickness ofthe brake linings. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.Do not add brake fluid. This does not correctthe error.
Only check the brake fluid level when the vehicleis on a level surface.If the brake fluid level is between MIN mark:and MAXmark; on the brake fluid reservoir, itis correct.
Maintenance
Service interval display
Service messagesInformation on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-let).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).The ASSYST service interval display informs youof the next service due date.If a service due date has been exceeded, youalso hear a warning tone.The multifunction display shows a service mes-sage for several seconds, e.g.:Service A in 99999 MilesService A Due Now
Service A Exceeded By 99999 MilesMaintaining the time-dependent service sched-ule:X Before disconnecting the battery, note downthe service due date displayed.
orX After reconnecting the battery, subtract thebattery disconnection periods from the ser-vice date shown on the display.i The service interval display should not beconfused with the4 engine oil level dis-play.
The symbol and the letter indicate which type ofservice is due:¯ Minor service A± Major service BThe ASSYST service interval display does nottake into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.
Hiding a service messageX To hide the service message, press the%back button on the multifunction steeringwheel (Y page 29)(Y page 172).
Displaying service messagesUse the buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.X Switch on the ignition.X Press= or; to select the standarddisplay menu on the steering wheel(Y page 173).
X Press9 or: to select the serviceinterval display.The¯ or± service symbol and the ser-vice due date are displayed.
Points to rememberThe specified maintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditions orincreased load on the vehicle, maintenancework must be carried out more frequently, forexample:Rregular city drivingwith frequent intermediatestopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travel shortdistances
240 MaintenanceMaintenance
andcare
Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for long periodsUnder these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires must becheckedmore often. Further information can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel/water separator
H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.
! If you continue driving without having thefuel/water separator serviced, this couldcause damage to the engine. Any resultingdamage is not covered by the warranty.
If the fuel/water separator needs servicing, thefollowing message appears in the multifunctiondisplay:
You will also hear a brief warning tone.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as soonas possible.
Care
General notes
G WARNINGMany cleaning products can be hazardous.Some are poisonous, others are flammable.Always follow the instructions on the particu-lar container. Always open your vehicle'sdoors or windows when cleaning the inside.Never use fluids or solvents that are notdesigned for cleaning your vehicle.
Always lock away cleaning products and keepthem out of reach of children.
! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any ofthe following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protective filmswith hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.You could otherwise scratch or damage thesurfaces and protective film.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.
H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsibleman-ner.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agents recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Exterior care
Automatic car wash
G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.
! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use special
Care 241
Maintenance
andcare
Z
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.
! Make sure that the automatic car wash issuitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold in theexterior mirrors before the vehicle is washed.The exterior mirrors could otherwise be dam-aged.
! Make sure that the automatic transmissionis in position N when washing your vehicle ina tow-through car wash. The vehicle could bedamaged if the transmission is in anotherposition.
! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof areclosed completely.Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating isswitched off (airflow control is turned toposition 0/theà andÁ buttons areswitched off).Rthewindshield wiper switch is at position0.The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe off waxfrom the windshield and the wiper blades. Thiswill prevent smears and reduce wiping noisescaused by residue on the windshield.
Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in all countriesconcerned.When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.Whenwashing the vehicle underbody, also cleanthe inside of the wheels.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.
X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-tle jet of water.
X Do not point thewater jet directly towards theair inlets.
X Use plenty of water and rinse out the spongefrequently.
X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.
X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-work.
Power washers
G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components. Compo-nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-edly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replaced imme-diately.
! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about thecorrect distance is available from the equip-ment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle around whencleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical components canlead to leaks or failures.
Cleaning the wheels! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.
! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
242 CareMaintenance
andcare
increased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes after cleaning.Braking heats the brake discs and the brakepads/linings, thus drying them. The vehiclecan then be parked.
Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected bycorrosion and damage caused by inadequatecare cannot always be completely repaired. Insuch cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X Soak insect remains with insect remover andrinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse offthe treated areas afterwards.
X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,fuels and greases by rubbing gently with acloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighterfluid.
X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care products recommen-ded and approved byMercedes-Benz. This is thecase approximately every three to five months,depending on the climate conditions and thecare product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if thepaint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benzshould be used.Do not use these care products in the sun or onthe hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to correct smaller areas of paintdamage quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishingproducts, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. Theseproducts are only suitable for high-gloss sur-faces. Their use on vehicles with matte finishleads to considerable surface damage (shiny,spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.
! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.
If your vehicle has a clear matte finish, observethe following instructions in order to avoid dam-age to the paintwork due to incorrect care.These notes also apply to light alloy wheels witha clear matte finish.
i The vehicle should preferably be washed byhand using a soft sponge, car shampoo andplenty of water.
i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the windows
G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.
! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-vents to clean the inside of the windows. Donot touch the insides of the windows withhard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. Thereis otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals andpollen may under certain circumstances pre-vent water from draining away. This can lead
Care 243
Maintenance
andcare
Z
to corrosion damage and damage to elec-tronic components.
X Clean the inside and outside of the windowswith a damp cloth and a cleaning product thatis recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.
! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper blade could be damaged.
! Do not clean wiper blades too often and donot rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-ite coating could be damaged. This couldcause wiper noise.
! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged if thewiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from thewindshield.
X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a dampcloth.
X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the headlampsX Clean the headlamp lenses with a dampsponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.
Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep a distanceof at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the power washer nozzle. Informationabout the correct distance is available fromthe equipment manufacturer.
X Clean sensors: of the driving systems withwater, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.
X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam-era lens:.
Cleaning chrome parts! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.
244 CareMaintenance
andcare
Impurities combined with the effects of road gritand corrosive environmental factors may causeflash rust to form on the surface. You canrestore the original shine of the chrome parts bycleaning them regularly, especially in winter andafter washing.X Clean the chrome parts with a chrome careproduct tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the trailer coupling
H Environmental noteDispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in anenvironmentally responsible manner.
! Do not clean the ball coupling with a powerwasher. Do not use solvents.
! Please note the care instructions in thetrailer coupling manufacturer's operatinginstructions.
Ball coupling: must be cleaned if it becomesdirty or corroded.X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball cou-pling:.
X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch isworking properly.
i You can also have the maintenance work onthe ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch car-ried out by a qualified specialist workshop.
Interior care
Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household cleaningagents
These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surface whencleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-age to the display.
X Before cleaning the display, make sure that itis switched off and has cooled down.
X Clean the display surface using a commer-cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCDdisplay cleaner.
X Dry the display surface using a dry microfibercloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bag deploy-ment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.
! Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.
! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent orsunscreen to come into contact with the plas-tic trim. Thismaintains the high-quality look ofthe surfaces.
X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-ucts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.
Care 245
Maintenance
andcare
Z
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have been recom-mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim strips! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishesor waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-ing the surface.
! Do not use chrome polish for trim strips. Thetrim strips have a chrome look but are mostlymade of anodized aluminum and can losetheir shine if chrome polish is used. Use adamp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaningthe trim strips.If the chrome-plated trim strips are very dirty,you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsureas to whether the trim strips are chrome-plated or not, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
X Wipe the wooden trim and trim strips with adamp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean genu-ine leather, artificial leather or DINAMICAcovers. If used often, these can damage thecover.
i Note that regular care is essential to ensurethat the appearance and comfort of the cov-ers is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefully witha damp cloth and then wipe the coversdown with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwise becomerough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:Rdifferences in the textureRmarks caused by growth and injuryRslight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.
Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leavethe seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning resultsdepend on the type of dirt and how long ithas been there.Rclean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event ofan accident. This poses an increased risk ofinjury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
246 CareMaintenance
andcare
! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts byheating at temperatures above 176 ‡ (80†)or in direct sunlight.
X Use clean, lukewarmwater and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush ordry shampoo.
X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaningagents recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.
Care 247
Maintenance
andcare
Z
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Where will I find...?
Warning triangle
Setting up the warning triangle
: Press-stud; Reflectors= FeetX Fold feet= down and out to the side.X Pull side reflectors; up to form a triangleand lock them at the top using press-stud:.
First-aid kiti Check the expiration date on the first-aid kitat least once a year. Replace the contents ifnecessary, and replace missing items.
Vehicle tool kit
General notesi When they leave the factory, vehicles arenot equipped with the tools needed to changea wheel, such as a jack or lug wrench. Sometools for changing a wheel are specific to thevehicle. To obtain tools approved for yourvehicle, contact a qualified specialist work-shop.
The vehicle tool kit contains:Rvehicle tool kit bag with:
- fuse extractor- an Allen key, e.g. to operate the sliding roofmanually in an emergency
- a pump lever for the vehicle jack- a screwdriver- Lug wrenchRjack
Vehicle tool kit
The vehicle tool kit is under the cover in thefootwell in front of the rear bench seat.X Fold cover: to the side.X Pull vehicle tool kit; out by the tab.
Jack! Make sure that, while installing the vehiclejack, there are no cables on the holder, inorder to avoid them becoming trapped.
248 Where will I find...?Breakdow
nassistance
Jack; is located under the rear bench seat onthe right-hand side when viewed in the directionof travel.X Fold rear bench seat (Y page 218) forwards.X Open cover:.X Pull bar= upwards and detach from tab?.X Remove jack;.
Exterior spare wheel bracket
General notes
G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire type ofthe spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.
i When changing a wheel, you should alsoobserve the safety notes in the "Flat tire" sec-tion (Y page 250).
The spare wheel is on the outer side of the reardoor.
Stainless-steel spare hub cap
X Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle tool kit(Y page 248).
X Open the lock on cover ring: with screw-driver= or a similar tool.
X Fold tab; down.
X Pull cover ring: apart and remove it.X Pull off trim panel?.
Where will I find...? 249
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
i When re-installing trim panel?, make surethat retainerA engages in recessB.
Removing the spare wheelThe sparewheel is heavy. Take particular note ofthis when removing the spare wheel.
X Remove wheel nuts:.X Remove the spare wheel.
Mounting the wheelAfter changing a wheel:X Repair or replace the damaged wheel as soonas possible and secure the spare wheel inplace again.
X Secure the damaged wheel on the sparewheel bracket with wheel nuts:. Whendoing so, make sure that the wheel cannotcome loose.
X When re-installing trim panel?, make surethat retainerB engages in recessA(Y page 249).
X Make sure that tab; is below when re-installing cover ring: (Y page 249).
X For safety reasons, regularly check to ensurethat the wheel is securely fastened.
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.
X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 89).
X Apply the parking brake.
X Bring the front wheels into the straight-aheadposition.
X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.The steering wheel lock stays active for aslong as the SmartKey is removed.
X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.
X Make sure that no one is near the danger areawhile a wheel is being changed. Anyone whois not directly assisting in the wheel changeshould, for example, stand behind the barrier.
X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to trafficconditions when doing so.
X Close the driver's door.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge are requiredwhen working on the battery, e.g. removal andinstallation. You should therefore have all workinvolving the battery carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or theESP® (Electronic Stability Program). The oper-ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.You could lose control of the vehicle, forexample:Rwhen brakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuversand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-dent, contact a qualified specialist workshopimmediately. Do not drive any further. You
250 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow
nassistance
should have all work involving the battery car-ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
If ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock duringbraking. This limits the steerability of the vehiclewhen braking and may increase the braking dis-tance.If ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be sta-bilized if it starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin.
i For further information about ABS andESP®, see (Y page 55) and (Y page 57).
G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produ-ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs orsparks are created, the hydrogen gas canignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into con-tact with vehicle parts.RNever placemetal objects or tools on a bat-tery.RIt is important that you observe the descri-bed order of the battery terminals whenconnecting and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting and dis-connecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.
G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of anexplosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms whencharging the battery as well as when jump-start-ing.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up ofelectrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-ple:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across the car-pet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth
G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.
! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-nanceBooklet or contact a qualified specialistworkshop for more information.
! You should have all work involving the bat-tery carried out at a qualified specialist work-shop. In the exceptional case that it is neces-sary for you to disconnect the battery your-self, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. Check that all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster are off.Otherwise, electronic components, such asthe alternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic systemmay be damaged.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. The vehicleis secured against rolling away. You canthen no longer move the vehicle.
The battery and the cover of the positive ter-minal clampmust be installed securely duringoperation.
Battery (vehicle) 251
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualified spe-cialist workshop or a specialcollection point for used bat-teries.
In order for the battery to achieve the maximumpossible service life, it must always be suffi-ciently charged.Comply with safety precautions and take pro-tective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling the bat-tery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic.Avoid contact with skin, eyes orclothing.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can dis-charge over time if you do not use the vehicle. Inthis case, have the battery disconnected at aqualified specialist workshop. You can alsocharge the batterywith a charger recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-ist workshop for further information.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use batteries which havebeen tested and approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz. These batteries provideincreased impact protection to prevent vehicleoccupants from suffering acid burns should thebattery be damaged in the event of an accident.Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle for alengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked for a long period of time.
i Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehi-cle and do not require any electrical consum-ers. The vehiclewill then use very little energy,thus conserving battery power.
i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. due to a discharged battery, you will haveto:Rset the clock. Information on setting theclock can be found in the separate operat-ing instructions.On vehicleswith COMANDand a navigationsystem, the clock is set automatically.Rreset the head restraints on the front seats(Y page 75)Rreset the function for folding the exteriormirrors in/out automatically, by folding themirrors out once (Y page 81).
Charging the battery
G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Donot inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
252 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow
nassistance
the battery. Keep children away from batter-ies. Wash away battery acid immediately withplenty of clean water and seek medical atten-tion.
G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at tempera-tures below freezing point. When jump-start-ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gasescan escape from the battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.
! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.
! Only use battery chargers with a maximumcharging voltage of 14.8 V.
! Only charge the installed battery with a bat-tery charger which has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. These batterychargers allow the battery to be chargedwhilestill installed in the vehicle.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do notlight up, it is highly likely that the dischargedbattery has frozen. In this case you may neitherjump-start the vehicle nor charge the battery.The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can beimpaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.A battery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for information and availability.Charge the battery in accordance with the oper-ating instructions for the battery charger.The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 254).X Read the operating instructions for the bat-tery charger.
X Open the hood (Y page 236).X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the same orderas when connecting the donor battery in thejump-starting procedure (Y page 254).
Battery (vehicle) 253
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a pos-itive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.
G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over thebattery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty ofclean water and seek medical attention.
G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
! Vehicleswith agasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, thecatalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up,it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start thevehicle nor charge the battery.Once the battery has thawed out, its service life may be dramatically reduced.The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures.Have the thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
254 Jump-startingBreakdow
nassistance
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, theengine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaustsystem are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected fora few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clampdo not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the pulley or the fan. These partsmove when the engine is started and while it is running.
X Apply the parking brake.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).X Open the hood (Y page 236).
Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-startingdevice.The jump-starting connection point consists of poles; and=.
Jump-starting 255
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
X Lift up cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal? of donor batteryB using thejumper cable. beginning with your own battery.
X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminalA of donor batteryB to ground point= of your vehicle using thejumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryB first.
X Start the engine.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground point= and negative terminalA, then from pos-itive clamp; and positive terminal?. Each time beginning with your vehicle's battery.
X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G WARNINGFunctions relevant to safety are restricted orno longer available if:Rthe engine is not running.Rthe brake system or the power steering ismalfunctioning.Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much moreforce may be necessary to steer or brake.There is a risk of an accident.In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,make sure that the steering moves freely.
G WARNINGWhen towing or tow-starting another vehicleand its weight is greater than the permissiblegross weight of your vehicle, the:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could roll-over.
There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than the per-missible gross weight of your vehicle.
! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function isactivated, the vehicle brakes automatically incertain situations. To prevent damage to thevehicle, deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and theHOLD function in the following or other simi-lar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash
! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30miles (50km). The towing speed of 30mph(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.
! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar to thetowing eyes. You could otherwise damage thevehicle.
! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Thiscould damage the vehicle.
! Do not use the towing eyes for recovery pur-poses as this could damage the vehicle. If indoubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high, thevehicles could be damaged.
! Your vehicles is equipped with an automatictransmission. Therefore, you must not havethe vehicle tow-started. The transmissionmay otherwise be damaged.
i Details on the permissible gross vehicleweight of your vehicle can be found on thevehicle identification plate (Y page 288).
256 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow
nassistance
It is better to have the vehicle transported thanto have it towed away.If the transfer case can be shifted into neutralN,you can tow the vehicle.If the transfer case cannot be shifted into neu-tral N, you can tow the vehicle with one axleraised. Please bear the following in mind:Rremove the propeller shaft between the trans-fer case and the rolling axle.Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 112).Rcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N.
i Disarm the automatic locking feature beforethe vehicle is towed (Y page 66). You couldotherwise be locked out when pushing or tow-ing the vehicle.
Towing eyes
Towing eyes, front
: Towing eyes, front
Towing eye, rear
Rear towing eye: is located under the bumper,on the left-hand side when viewed in the direc-tion of travel.
Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 256).X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 89).i In order to signal a change of direction whentowing the vehicle with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual. In this case, only the indicatorlamps for the direction of travel flash. Afterresetting the combination switch, the hazardwarning lamp starts flashing again.
X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.
X Shift the transfer case to neutral positionN (Y page 163).
X Shift the automatic transmission to positionN.
X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake (Y page 131).
i The transmission can only change gear if thebattery has sufficient charge.If you cannotmove the selector lever toN, thepropeller shafts to the driven axles must beremoved.
Towing and tow-starting 257
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
Transporting the vehicle
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto-matic transmission
! When the vehicle is loaded for transport, thefront and rear axlesmust be stationary and onthe same transportation vehicle. Positioningover the connection point of the transportvehicle is not permitted. The drive train mayotherwise be damaged.
All vehicles! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise, thevehicle could be damaged.
Use the towing eyes to pull the vehicle if it needsto be transported on a trailer or transporter(Y page 257).X Apply the parking brake.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112).
X Shift the selector lever to N.X Shift the transfer case to neutral(Y page 163).
X Secure the towing cable to the towing eyes(Y page 257).
X Make sure that the vehicle cannot roll away.X Release the parking brake.X Load the vehicle onto the transporter.As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Apply the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to positionP.
X Turn the SmartKey to position0 in the ignitionlock (Y page 112) and remove it.
X Secure the vehicle.
Recovering a vehicle that has becomestuck! When recovering a vehicle that has becomestuck, pull it as smoothly and evenly as pos-sible. Excessive tractive power could damagethe vehicles.
If the drive wheels have become stuck in looseor muddy ground, pull the vehicle out withextreme caution, especially so if the vehicle isloaded.Never attempt to recover a stuck vehicle with atrailer attached.Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible usingthe tracks it made when it became stuck.
Towing in the event of malfunctions
General notes! If you are removing the propeller shaft, useM10 nuts as spacers on the M8 bolts andsecure them with M8 nuts.New self-locking nuts must be used when thepropeller shafts are refitted.
X Observe the safety notes as you do so(Y page 256).
i Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.
Engine damage, gear damage or electri-cal malfunctionsX Move the selector lever to posi-tion N(Y page 119).
X Shift the transfer case to neu-tral(Y page 163).
In the event of damage to the transfercaseHave the propeller shafts between the axles andthe transfer case removed.
258 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow
nassistance
In the event of damage to the front axleHave the propeller shaft between the rear axleand the transfer case removed.Have the vehicle towed with the front axleraised.
In the event of damage to the rear axleHave the propeller shaft between the front axleand the transfer case removed.Have the vehicle towed with the rear axle raisedand with wheel rollers under the front axle.
Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmission mustnot be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-age the automatic transmission.
You can find information on "Jump-starting"under (Y page 254).
Fuses
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-age, the electric cables could be overloaded.This could result in a fire. There is a risk of anaccident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.
! Only use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and which have thecorrect fuse rating for the system concerned.Otherwise, components or systems could bedamaged.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-nents on the circuit and their functions stopoperating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of thesame rating, which you can recognize by thecolor and value. The fuse ratings are listed in thefuse allocation chart.
i If a fuse has blown, contact a breakdownservice or an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-ter.
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualified special-ist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.
Before changing a fuseX Park the vehicle and apply the parking brake.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RMain fuse box on the driver's side of the dash-boardRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellRFuse box in the transmission tunnelRFuse box in the battery caseRFuse box in the cargo compartmentThe fuse allocation chart and the spare fuses arein the main fuse box on the dashboard(Y page 259).You will find the fuse removal device in the vehi-cle tool kit (Y page 248).
Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as a screw-driver to open the cover in the dashboard. Youcould damage the dashboard or the cover.
! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.
Fuses 259
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
X Open the front-passenger door.X To open: pull cover: outwards in the direc-tion of the arrow and remove it.
X To close: clip in cover: on the front of thedashboard.
X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.
Fuse box in the front-passenger foot-well! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.
X Unscrew screws:.X Lift up cover; in the direction of the arrow.
= Fuse box
Fuse box in the transmission tunnel! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.
X Fold down the cup holder on the center con-sole (Y page 220).
X Adjust the front-passenger seat to its fore-most position (Y page 74).
X To open: remove screws:.X Remove cover; in the direction of thearrow.
X To close: clip in cover;.X Install cover; with screws:.
Fuse box in the battery caseThe fuses in the battery case do not usually needto be replaced. If a fuse change is necessary,consult a qualified specialist workshop.
260 FusesBreakdow
nassistance
Fuse box in the cargo compartment! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.
! When closing the cover, make sure that it islying correctly on the fuse box.Moisture seep-ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-ation of the fuses.
X Open the rear door.X To open: pull cover: in the direction of thearrow and remove it.
Fuses 261
Breakdow
nassistance
Z
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel
G WarningA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.do not drive with a flat tire. Immediatelyreplace the flat tire with your spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ifyou require information on tested and recom-mendedwheels and tires for summer andwinterdriving. Advice on purchasing and caring fortires is also available there.
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-rectly can impair the operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialist work-shop and ask about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be found inthe "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 284).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flapRin the "Tire pressure" section
i Further information on wheels and tires canbe obtained at any qualified specialist work-shop.
Operation
Notes on drivingIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tirepressures and correct them if necessary.When parking your vehicle, make sure that thetires do not get deformed by the curb or otherobstacles. If it is necessary to drive over curbs,speed humps or similar elevations, try to do soslowly and at an obtuse angle. Otherwise, thetires, particularly the sidewalls, may be dam-aged.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-sure loss. As a result, you could lose control ofyour vehicle. There is a risk of accident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.
RRegularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damage includes bulges and deforma-tion on tires, cuts, punctures, cracks or
262 OperationWheelsandtires
severe corrosion on wheels, for example.Damagedwheels can cause a loss of tire pres-sure.RRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 263). In order to inspectthe inner side of the tire surface, turn thesteering wheel to full lock.RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notinstall anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or a valve cap approved byMercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not install anything onto the valve, such astire pressure monitoring systems.RYou should regularly check the pressure of allyour tires including the spare wheel, particu-larly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-sure as necessary (Y page 270).
The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered
Tire tread
G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the driving con-ditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear at differ-ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.
Marking: shows the tread wear indicator(TWI). The arrow indicates the placement of thetire tread.Do not drive with tires which have too little treaddepth. tire traction onwet road surfaces decrea-ses significantly when the tread depth is lessthan 1/8 in (3 mm).Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.Six indicators are positioned over the tire tread.They are visible once the tread depth is approx-imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm). If this is the case, thetire is so worn that it must be replaced.The recommended tread depth for summer tiresis at least 1/8 in (3 mm). The recommendedtread depth for winter tires is at least 1/6 in(4 mm).
Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same typeand make.ROnly mount approved tires of the correct sizeonto the wheels.RTires are supplied with a protective layer fromthe factory. Break in new tires at moderatespeeds for the first 60 miles (100 km). Theyonly reach their full performance after thisdistance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reduces thetraction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to thespare wheel.
Operation 263
Wheelsandtires
Z
Winter operation
General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 281).
Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on your vehicleto M+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility forthis type of damage.
M+S tires
G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. There isa risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanã in(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
G WARNINGWheel and tire dimensions as well as the typeof tire can vary between the spare wheel andthe wheel to be replaced. When the sparewheel is mounted, driving characteristics maybe severely affected. There is a risk of an acci-dent.In order to reduce risks:Ryou should therefore adapt your drivingstyle and drive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheelthat differs from the wheel to be replaced.Ronly use a spare wheel that differs from thewheel to be replaced for a short time.Rdo not deactivate ESP®.Rhave a spare wheel that differs from thewheel that has been changed replaced at
the nearest qualified specialist workshop.You must observe the correct wheel andtire dimensions as well as the wheel type.
Do not exceed a maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h) if a spare wheel of a different size isinstalled.At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use all-season tires orwinter tires. Both types of tire areidentified by the M+S marking.Not all tires with the M+S marking provide thedriving characteristics of winter tires. In additionto the M+S marking, winter tires also have thei snowflake symbol on the tire wall. Tireswith this marking fulfill the requirements of theRubber Manufacturers Association (RMA) andthe Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) regard-ing snow traction, and were specially developedfor driving on snow. Only these tires will allowdriving safety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter, since these tireshave been designed specifically for driving onsnow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread on allwheels to maintain safe handling characteris-tics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 265).X Restart the tire pressure monitor(Y page 270).
i You can obtain information about wintertires that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz especially for your vehicle at anyMercedes-Benz Service center.
i For further information about tires, see(Y page 286).
Snow chains
G WARNINGIf you drive too fast with snow chains moun-ted, they may snap. As a result, you couldinjure others and damage the vehicle. There isa risk of an accident.
264 Winter operationWheelsandtires
Observe the maximum permissible speed foroperation with snow chains.
! Information about the use of snow chaincompatible AMG winter tires is applicable forAMG tires. Use of snow chains is only per-missible with these tires.
! Onsome tire sizes there is not enough spacefor snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehi-cle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com-binations" section under "Tires and wheels".
! Check the snow chains for damage beforemounting them. Damaged or worn snowchains may snap and damage the followingcomponents:RwheelRwheel housingRwheel suspensionFor this reason, you must use only snowchains that are free of defects. Observe themanufacturer's mounting instructions.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use snow chains that havebeen specially approved for your vehicle byMercedes-Benz, or are of a correspondingstandard of quality.ROnly use snow chains when driving on roadscompletely covered by snow. Remove thesnow chains as soon as possible when youcome to a road that is not snow-covered.RLocal regulationsmay restrict the use of snowchains. Observe the appropriate regulations ifyou wish to mount snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bearthe following points in mind:RSnow chains cannot be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations (Y page 284).RMount snow chains only in pairs and only onthe rear wheels. Observe the manufacturer'smounting instructions.
i Youmay wish to deactivate ESP® when pull-ing away with snow chains installed(Y page 57). You can thereby allow thewheelsto spin in a controlled manner, achieving anincreased driving force (cutting action).
For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the loadand vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/orunevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steer-ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tires includ-ing the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tire pressuretables are examples. Tire pressure specifica-tions are vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data shown here. The tire pressurespecifications that are valid for your vehiclecan be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard and tire pressure table on thevehicle.
General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with a trailer: the applicable valuefor the rear tires is the maximum tire pressurevalue stated in the table inside the fuel filler flap.Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
Tire pressure 265
Wheelsandtires
Z
Tire and Loading Information placard
: Recommended tire pressuresThe Tire and Loading Information placard is onthe B-pillar on the driver's side (Y page 271).The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires. The recommended tire pressures are validfor the maximum permissible load and up to themaximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table
Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factoryThe tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuelfiller flap.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only valid forthat tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in the tablefor different numbers of occupants and amountsof luggage. The actual number of seats may dif-fer.
Some tire pressure tables only show the rimdiameter instead of the complete tire size, e.g.R16. Rim diameter is part of the tire size and canbe found on the tire sidewall (Y page 276).If the tire pressures have been set to the lowervalues for lighter loads and/or lower roadspeeds, the pressures should be reset to thehigher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds
i The tire pressures for increased loads and/or higher road speeds, shown in the tire pres-sure table, may have a negative effect on driv-ing comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this canlead to an excessive build-up of heat and a sud-den loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Important notes on tire pressure
G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-sure monitors keep the tire valve open. Thiscan also result in tire pressure loss. There is arisk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.
266 Tire pressureWheelsandtires
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tirepressure. The outer appearance of a tire doesnot permit any reliable conclusion about the tirepressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-tronic tire pressure monitoring system, the tirepressure can be checked using the on-boardcomputer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This is dependenton the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-sures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without directsunlight on the tires for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has been driven for less than1 mile (1.6 km).
The tire temperature changes depending on theoutside temperature, the vehicle speed and thetire load. If the tire temperature changes by18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes byapproximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Takethis into account when checking the pressure ofwarm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it istoo low for the current operating conditions. Ifyou check the tire pressure when the tires arewarm, the resulting value will be higher than ifthe tires were cold. This is normal. Do notreduce the tire pressure to the value specifiedfor cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwisebe too low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap
Observe the following for the tire pressure onthe spare wheel:Rthe tire and loading information table on theB-pillar on the driver's side.Rthe tire pressure sticker on the inside of thefuel filler flap.
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflation
G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low can over-heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-ing properties and the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handling charac-teristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflation
G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.
Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRhave an adverse effect on handling charac-teristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage
Tire pressure 267
Wheelsandtires
Z
Maximum tire pressures
: Example: maximum permissible tire pres-sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the recom-mended tire pressure for your vehicle whenadjusting the tire pressure (Y page 279).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 265).Information on air pressure for the tires on yourvehicle can be found:Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap(Y page 266)Rin the "Tire pressure data" section(Y page 265)
Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tire pressure,proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to bechecked.
X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.
X Read the tire pressure and compare it to therecommended value on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on fuel filler flap of yourvehicle (Y page 266).
X The tire pressure is too low: increase thetire pressure to the recommended value.
X The tire pressure is too high: press downthe metal pin in the valve using the tip of apen, for example.Air is released from the tire.
X Check the tire pressure again with the tirepressure gauge.
X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure monitor
Important safety notes
G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressure rec-ommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's door B-pillar or the tire pressurelabel on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If yourvehicle has tires of a different size than thesize indicated on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard or the tire pressure label, youshould determine the proper tire pressure forthose tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-sure telltale when one or more of your tiresare significantly underinflated. Accordingly,when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,you should stop and check your tires as soonas possible, and inflate them to the properpressure. Driving on a significantly underin-flated tire causes the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Underinflation alsoreduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle's handling and stop-ping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv-er's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:
268 Tire pressureWheelsandtires
Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequencewill be repeated every time the vehi-cle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunc-tions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the mounting of incompatiblereplacement or alternate tires or wheels onthe vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-tioning properly. Always check the TPMSmal-function telltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure thatthe replacement or alternate tires and wheelsallow the TPMS to continue to function prop-erly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to the recommended cold tire pressuresuitable for the operating situation(Y page 265). Note that the correct tire pressurefor the current operating situation must first betaught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there isa substantial loss of pressure, the warningthreshold for the warning message is aligned tothe reference values taught-in. Restart the tirepressure monitor after adjusting to the cold tirepressure (Y page 270). The current pressuresare saved as new reference values. As a result, awarning message will appear if the tire pressuredrops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn you ofan incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe thenotes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 265).The tire pressuremonitor is not able to warn youof a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire ispenetrated by a foreign object. In the event of asudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to ahalt by braking carefully. Avoid sudden steeringmovements.In order to check the tire pressure, the vehicle'swheels are installed with sensors that monitor
the tire pressure in all four tires. The tire pres-sure monitor warns you if the pressure drops inone or more of the tires. The tire pressure mon-itor only functions if the correct sensors areinstalled on all wheels.The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warninglamp in the instrument cluster for indicatingpressure loss/malfunctions (USA) or pressureloss (Canada). Whether the warning lampflashes or lights up indicates whether a tirepressure is too low or the tire pressure monitoris malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tirepressure on one or more tires is significantlytoo low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-functioning.RUSA only: if the warning lamp flashes foraround a minute and then remains lit con-stantly, the tire pressure monitor is malfunc-tioning.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in themultifunction display. After a few minutes ofdriving, the current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.USA only: the tire pressure warning lamp willinform you of a malfunction in the tire pressuremonitor by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. It may take morethan ten minutes before the data menu is dis-played. When the malfunction has been recti-fied, the tire pressure warning lamp goes outafter a few minutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from those meas-ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. Thetire pressures shown by the on-board computerrefer to those measured at sea level. At highaltitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by apressure gauge are higher than those shown bythe on-board computer. In this case, do notreduce the tire pressures.The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radio transmit-ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-wayradios) thatmay be being operated in or near thevehicle.
i USA only:This device complies with part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and
Tire pressure 269
Wheelsandtires
Z
2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.
i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 of Indus-try Canada. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful inter-ference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to this devicecould void the user's authority to operate theequipment.
Checking the tire pressure electroni-callyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 112).
X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire is shownin the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a few minutesmessage appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-itor automatically detects new wheels or newsensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tirepressure value to the individual wheels is notpossible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Activedisplay message is shown instead of the tirepressure display. The tire pressures are alreadybeing monitored.
i If a spare wheel is mounted, the systemmaycontinue to show the tire pressure of thewheel that has been removed for a fewminutes. Observe that the displayed value isnot the same as the current tire pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel.
Tire pressure monitor warning mes-sagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects a significantpressure loss on one or more tires, a warningmessage is shown in themultifunction display. Awarning tone also sounds and the tire pressurewarning lamp lights up in the instrument cluster.Each tire that is affected by a significant loss ofpressure is highlighted in the pressure display.X If the Correct Tire Pressure messageappears in the multifunction display, checkthe tire pressure on all four wheels and cor-rect it if necessary.
X If the Check Tires message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in oneor more tires has dropped significantly andthe tires must be checked.
X If the Tire Press. Warning CautionTire Malfunction message appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure in oneor more tires has dropped suddenly and thetires must be checked.
i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may be displayedfor thewrong positions for a short time. This isrectified after a few minutes of driving, andthe tire pressures are displayed for the cor-rect positions.
Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor, allexisting warning messages are deleted and thewarning lamps go out. Themonitor uses the cur-rently set tire pressures as the reference valuesfor monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressuremonitor will automatically detect the new refer-ence values after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also define refer-ence values manually as described here.X Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-ded for the corresponding driving situation onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onthe driver's side B-pillar (Y page 265).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 265).
X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct onall four wheels.
270 Tire pressureWheelsandtires
X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2in the ignition lock (Y page 112).
X Press the= or; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.
X Press the9 or: button to selectTire Pressure.X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows the currenttire pressure for the individual tires or theTire pressure will be displayedafter driving a few minutes message.
X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as New Ref‐erence Valuesmessage appears in the mul-tifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmes-sage appears in the multifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressures arewithin the specified range. The new tire pres-sures are then accepted as reference valuesand monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.
: B-pillar, driver's sideTwo instruction labels on your vehicle show themaximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tireand Loading Information placard shows themaximum permissible number of occu-pants and themaximumpermissible vehicleload. It also contains details of the tire sizesand corresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-tification plate informs you of the grossvehicle weight rating. It is made up of thevehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, thefuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-mation about the maximum gross axleweight rating on the front and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle). Do not exceedthe maximum gross vehicle weight or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.
Maximum permissible gross mass
Loading the vehicle 271
Wheelsandtires
Z
X Specification for maximum permissibleload: is listed on the Tire and Loading Infor-mation placard: "The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo should never exceedXXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, cargo,luggage and trailer load/noseweight (if applica-ble) must not exceed the specified value.
i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. Themaximum permissible loadis vehicle-specific and may deviate from thedata shown here. The maximum permissibleload that applies for your vehicle can be foundon your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informa-tion placard.
Number of seats
Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Information plac-ard.
i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in the illustrationare examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown.The number of seats in your vehicle can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor VehicleSafety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’sTire and Loading Information placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be riding inyour vehicle.
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kilograms orXXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-city. Example: if the "XXX" amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs pas-sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-cle. That weight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity cal-culated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will betowing a trailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. This reduces theavailable cargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (Y page 298).
272 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires
Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varyingseating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximumload of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using theactual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard(Y page 271).The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 298).Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum weight ofoccupants andcargo (data from theTire and Loading Information plac-ard)
1500 lbs(680 kg)
1500 lbs(680 kg)
1500 lbs(680 kg)
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)
5 3 1
Distribution of theoccupants
Front: 2Rear: 3
Front: 1Rear: 2
Front: 1
Weight of the occu-pants
Occupant 1: 150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)
Occupant 1:150 lbs(68 kg)
Gross weight of alloccupants
750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs(68 kg)
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Permissible load(maximum grossvehicle weight rat-ing from the Tire andLoading Informationplacard minus thegross weight of alloccupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò540 lbs (245 kg)=960 lbs (435 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)
Loading the vehicle 273
Wheelsandtires
Z
Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total load care-fully, you should still make sure that the grossvehicle weight rating and the gross axle weightrating are not exceeded. Details can be found onthe vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 271).Gross vehicle weight rating: the gross weightof the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailerload/noseweight (if applicable) must notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating.Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-mum permissible weight that can be carried byone axle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed themaximum permissible values (gross vehicleweight and maximum gross axle weight rating),have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-pants, load and full trailer load if applicable)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.
Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, thetrailer load/noseweight is included in the loadalong with occupants and luggage. The trailerload/noseweight is usually approximately 10 %of the gross weight of the trailer and its load.Only use a trailer tow hitch that has beenapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.Comply with the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for operation, care and mainte-nance.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-ards
Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.government specifications. Their purpose is toprovide drivers with uniform reliable informationon tire performance data. Tire manufacturershave to grade tires using three performance fac-tors:: tread wear grade,; traction grade and= temperature grade. These regulations do notapply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold inNorth America are provided with the corre-sponding quality grading markings on the side-wall of the tire.Where applicable, the tire grading informationcan be found on the tire sidewall between thetread shoulder and maximum tire width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tiresmust conform to the stat-utory safety requirements in addition to thesegrades.
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.
TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified U.S.government course. For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and one-half times as well
274 Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsWheelsandtires
on the government test track as a tire graded100.The relative performance of tires depends uponthe actual conditions of their use, however, andmay depart significantly from the norm, due tovariations in driving habits, service practicesand differences in road characteristics and cli-mate conditions.
Traction
G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cor-nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-acteristics.
! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage tothe drive train.
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent thetire's ability to stop on a wet surface as meas-ured under controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and con-crete. A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry road surfaces.You should pay special attention to road condi-tions when temperatures are around freezingpoint.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum treaddepth ofã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.Observe the legally required minimum tire treaddepth (Y page 263). Winter tires can reduce thebraking distance on snow-covered surfaces incomparison with summer tires. The braking dis-tance is still much further than on surfaces thatare not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-priate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)(Y page 264).
Temperature
G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire is estab-lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, either separately orin combination, can cause excessive heatbuild-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,and C. These represent the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-tained high temperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to sudden tirefailure. The grade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimum required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview of tire labeling
: Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 279)
; DOT tire Identification Number(Y page 278)
= Maximum tire load (Y page 278)? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 268)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 279)C Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speed rating (Y page 276)
Tire labeling 275
Wheelsandtires
Z
D Load identification (Y page 277)E Tire nameThe markings described above are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation) andthe manufacturer's name.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating
G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-city and the approved maximum speed couldlead to tire damage or the tire bursting. Thereis a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.
: Tire width; Height-width ratio in percentage= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed ratingGeneral: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, a letter is imprinted into the tire wallbefore the size description.If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-tion (as shown above): these are passengervehicle tires according to European manufac-turing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: passengervehicle tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.
If "P" precedes the size description: light trucktires according to U.S. manufacturing stand-ards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominal tirewidth in millimeters.Height-width ratio: height-width ratio; is theratio between tire height and tire width. Theaspect ratio is calculated by dividing the tirewidth by the tire height. The resulting quotient isgiven as a percentage.Tire code: tire code= shows the tire type. "R"represents radial tires; "D" represents diagonaltires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of over149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the sizedescription, depending on the manufacturer(e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is the diameterof the bead seat, not the diameter of the rimflange. The rim diameter is specified ininches (in).The load-bearing index: load-bearing indexA(also load index), is a code that contains themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 271).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.For further information on the maximum tireload in kilograms and pounds, see(Y page 278).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 277).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observethe speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt yourdriving style to the traffic conditions.
i Since 2009, tires in Europe which corre-spond to the noise limitations of DirectiveECE-R 117 show an >>S<< (Sound) mark. This
276 Tire labelingWheelsandtires
identification follows the type approval num-ber and has no connection with the speedrating.
Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on the man-ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up of load-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no service specifications,ask the tire manufacturer in order to find outthe maximum speed.If a service specification is available, the max-imum speed is limited according to the speedrating in the service specification. Example:245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" isthe service specification. The letter "Y" rep-resents the speed rating and the maximumspeed of the tire is limited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with maxi-mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)must include "ZR", and the service specifica-tion must be given in parentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-cates that the maximum speed of the tire isover 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-ufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S4 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S4 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S4 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S4 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to theM+Smarking, winter tires alsohave thei snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association ofCanada (RAC). These tires have been devel-oped specifically for driving on snow.
When the electronic speed limiter is set, yourvehicle is prevented from exceeding 130 mph(210 km/h).The speed rating of tires mounted at the factorymay be higher than themaximum speed that theelectronic speed limiter permits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 286).Further information about reading tire data canbe obtained from any qualified specialist work-shop.
Load index
In addition to the load bearing index, load rat-ing: may be imprinted after the letters that
4 Or M+Si for winter tires.
Tire labeling 277
Wheelsandtires
Z
identify speed ratingB on the sidewall of thetire (Y page 276).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standard load(SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that dependson themaximum load that the tire can carry ata certain pressure
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
Maximum tire load: is the maximum permis-sible weight for which the tire is approved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximum permissibleload can be found on the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillar onthe driver's side (Y page 271).
i The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-cific and may deviate from the values in theillustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every man-ufacturer of new tires or retreader has to imprinta TIN in or on the sidewall of each tire produced.
The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables tire manufacturers to inform pur-chasers of recalls and other safety-relevantmat-ters. It makes it possible for the purchaser toeasily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-tion code;, tire size=, tire type code? andmanufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complies withthe requirements of the U.S. Department ofTransportation.Manufacturer identification code: manufac-turer identification code; provides details onthe tire manufacturer. New tires have a codewith two symbols. Retreaded tires have a codewith four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 262).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be used bythe manufacturer as a code to describe specificcharacteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureAprovides information about the age of a tire. Thefirst and second positions represent the week ofmanufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-endar week. Positions three and four representthe year of manufacture. For example, a tire thatis marked with "3208", was manufactured inweek 32 in 2008.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.
278 Tire labelingWheelsandtires
Tire characteristics
This information describes the type of tire cordand the number of layers in sidewall: andunder tire tread;.
i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviatefrom the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and load-ing
Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of layers or the number ofrubber-coated belts in the tread and the sidewallof the tire. These are made of steel, nylon, pol-yester and other materials.
BarMetric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 poundsper square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)are the equivalent of 1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of theU S Department of Transportation.
Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which the vehicleis designedmultiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality of tireswith regards to tread quality, tire traction andtemperature characteristics. The quality grad-ing assessment is made by the manufacturerfollowing specifications from the U.S. govern-
ment. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall ofthe tire.
Recommended tire pressuresThe recommended tire pressure applies to thetires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placard con-tains the recommended tire pressures for coldtires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-mum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains the recommen-ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-ditions.
Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipmentThe combined weight of all standard andoptional equipment available for the vehicle,regardless of whether it is actually installed onthe vehicle or not.
RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tire ismounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. The grossaxle weight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.
Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tire identification.It specifies the speed range for which the tire isapproved.
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)The GTW is the weight of a trailer including theweight of the load, luggage, accessories etc. onthe trailer.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weight ofthe vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel,accessories installed, occupants, luggage and
Tire labeling 279
Wheelsandtires
Z
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The grossvehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-cle identification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (theweight of thevehicle including all accessories, occupants,fuel, luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable). The gross vehicle weight rating isspecified on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side.
Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment
Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure isbar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.
Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewall ofthe tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacitymore precisely.
Curb weightTheweight of a vehicle with standard equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil andcoolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-tem and optional equipment if these are instal-led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-gers or luggage.
Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating is the maximum per-missible weight in kilograms or lbs for which atire is approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculated bydividing the maximum axle load of one axle bytwo.
PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tire widthin percent.
Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying an out-ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds persquare inch (psi), in kilopascals (kPa) or in bar.The tire pressure should only be corrected whenthe tires are cold.
Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without directsunlight on the tires for at least three hoursandRif the vehicle has not been driven further than1 mile (1.6 km)
TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contact withthe road.
BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sits securelyon thewheel. There are several steel wires in thebead to prevent the tire from coming loose fromthe wheel rim.
SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.
280 Tire labelingWheelsandtires
Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-formance battery, are not included in the curbweight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be used bya tire manufacturer to identify tires, for examplefor a product recall, and thus identify the pur-chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-er's identity code, tire size, tire type code andthe manufacturing date.
Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is a codethat contains the maximum load bearing capa-city of a tire.
TractionTraction is the result of friction between the tiresand the road surface.
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)The TWR specifies the maximum permissibleweight that the ball coupling of the trailer towhitch can support.
Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is levelwith the bars, the wear limit ofá in (1.6 mm)has been reached.
Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle at theirdesignated seating positions.
Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 150 lb(68 kilograms)multiplied by the number of seatsin the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 250) contains information and notes onhow to deal with a flat tire.
Rotating the wheels
G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-dent.Rotate front and rear wheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.
! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components are locatedin the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be used nearthe valve. This could damage the electroniccomponents.Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-cialist workshop.
Rotating front and rear wheels of differingdimensions can render the general operatingpermit invalid.Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notices in the section on "Changing awheel and mounting a spare wheel"(Y page 282).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tires inthe center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to the intervalsin the tire manufacturer's warranty book in yourvehicle documents. If no warranty book is avail-able, the tires should be rotated every 3,000 to6,000 miles (5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier iftire wear requires. Do not change the directionof wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and thebrake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-
Changing a wheel 281
Wheelsandtires
Z
ted. Check the tire pressure and reactivate thetire pressure monitor (Y page 268) if necessary.
Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotation haveadditional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-planing. You will only gain these benefits if thecorrect direction of rotation is observed.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates itscorrect direction of rotation.You may mount the spare wheel against thedirection of rotation. Adhere to the time restric-tion on use as well as the speed limitation speci-fied on the spare wheel.
Storing wheelsStore tires that are not being used in a cool, dryand preferably dark place. Protect the tires fromoil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
G WARNINGWhen you remove the spare wheel from thespare wheel bracket, the vehicle’s weight dis-tribution changes. If the vehicle is alreadyraised, the jack could tip over. There is a riskof injury.Remove the sparewheel from the sparewheelbracket before lifting the vehicle.
X Prepare the vehicle as described(Y page 250).
X Remove the vehicle tool kit and the jack(Y page 248).
X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.
X Remove the sparewheel from the sparewheelbracket (Y page 249).
i Vehicles without a spare wheel or emer-gency spare wheel are not equipped with atire-change tool kit at the factory. For moreinformation on which tools are required toperform a wheel change on your vehicle e.g.
lug wrench or jack, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling awayX On level ground: place chocks or other suit-able items under the front and rear of thewheel that is diagonally opposite the wheelyou wish to change.
X On downhill gradients: place chocks orother suitable items in front of the wheels ofthe front and rear axle.
Raising the vehicle
G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jackmust be positioned vertically, directly underthe jacking point of the vehicle.
! The jack is designed exclusively for jackingup the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-wise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:RTo raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-cific jack that has been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.RThe jack is designed only to raise and hold thevehicle for a short time while a wheel is beingchanged. It is not suited for performing main-tenance work under the vehicle.RAvoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-hill slopes.RBefore raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-ing away by applying the parking brake andinserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage theparking brake while the vehicle is raised.RThe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,load-bearing underlay must be used. On aslippery surface, a non-slip underlay must beused, e.g. rubber mats.RDo not use wooden blocks or similar objectsas a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jackwill not
282 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacitydue to the restricted height.RMake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground does notexceed 1.2 in (3 cm).RDo not place your hands or feet under theraised vehicle.RDo not lie under the vehicle.RDo not start the engine when the vehicle israised.RDo not open or close a door when the vehicleis raised.RMake sure that no persons are present in thevehicle when the vehicle is raised.
X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts on thewheel you wish to change by about one fullturn. Do not unscrew the wheel bolts com-pletely.
Pump lever;X Assemble the pump lever for the jack. It canbe found with the vehicle tool kit(Y page 248).
X Turn pressure release screw= clockwise asfar as it will go using notch; on the pumplever.Pressure release screw= is closed.i Do not turn pressure release screw= bymore than one to two revolutions. Otherwise,hydraulic fluid could escape.
X Set jack: on solid ground.X Position jack: on the axle carrier tube; ofthe front or rear axle. Jack: must alwaysstand vertically, even on slopes.Make sure that jack: is correctly positionedunder axle carrier tube;. The front or rearaxlemust sit securely in the recess of jack:.
X Raise the vehicle by pumping in the directionof the arrow until the tire is 1.2 in (3 cm) offthe ground at the most.
Removing a wheel! Donot placewheel bolts in sand or on a dirtysurface. The bolt andwheel hub threads couldotherwise be damaged when you screw themin.
X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.
Changing a wheel 283
Wheelsandtires
Z
Mounting a new wheel
G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts/wheel nuts anddamaged wheel bolt/wheel nut/wheel hubthreads can cause wheel bolts/wheel nuts tocome loose. As a result, you could lose awheel while driving. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Never oil or greasewheel bolts/wheel nuts. Inthe event of damage to the threads, contact aqualified specialist workshop immediately.Have the damaged wheel bolts/wheel nuts orhub threads replaced/renewed. Do not con-tinue driving.
G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.
! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section(Y page 281).X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-faces.
X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.
X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-tight.
Lowering the vehicle
G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.
X Open the pressure release screw on the jackusing the pump lever (Y page 282) by approx-imately one turn.
X Lower the vehicle until it is once again stand-ing firmly on the ground.
X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswisepattern in the sequence indicated (: toA).The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft(130 Nm).
X Disassemble the pump lever.X Push the jack piston back in and close thedrain plug.
X Use the bolts to secure the faulty wheel to thespare wheel bracket (Y page 249).
X Stow the jack and the vehicle tools in thevehicle again.
X Check the tire pressure of the newly installedwheel and adjust it if necessary.A table with the tire pressures for your vehiclecan be found on the B-pillar on the driver'sside.
Wheel and tire combinations
General notes
G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-dent.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.
284 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires
When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel
G WarningA flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.do not drive with a flat tire. Immediatelyreplace the flat tire with your spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.
! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-mends that you only use tires, wheels andaccessories which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for your vehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the driving safety systems, such asABS or ESP®.Only use tires, wheels or accessories testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certaincharacteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noiseemissions or fuel consumption, may other-wise be adversely affected. In addition, whendriving with a load, tire dimension variationscould cause the tires to come into contactwith the bodywork and axle components. Thiscould result in damage to the tires or the vehi-cle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-age resulting from the use of tires, wheels oraccessories other than those tested andapproved.Further information about wheels, tires andapproved combinations can be obtained fromany authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i The recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:
Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of thefuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tirepressure under various operating conditions.Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with the mainte-nance recommendations of the tire manufac-turer in the vehicle document wallet.
Further information on recommended tire pres-sure as well as tire pressures for specific drivingsituations (Y page 279).
i Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)Rtires of the same type on your vehicle at agiven time (summer tires, winter tires, all-weather tires, all-terrain tires)
i The following pages contain information onapproved wheels and tire sizes for equippingyour vehicle with winter tires. Winter tires arenot available at the factory as standard equip-ment or optional extras.If you want to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, it may be necessary toobtain wheel rims in the corresponding size.The size of the approved winter tires may dif-fer from the standard tires. This is dependenton the model and the equipment installed atthe factory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.
i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.
Wheel and tire combinations 285
Wheelsandtires
Z
Tires
G 550
All-weather tiresTires (radial tires) Alloy wheels
265/60 R18 110V M+S 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 43
265/60 R18 110 H M+S 7.5J x 18 H2 ET 43
275/55 R19 111V M+S5 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 50
i You can obtain information about tires and tire dimensions that are not listed here at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G 63 AMG
Summer tiresTires Alloy wheels
275/50 R20 113W XL6 9.5J x 20 H2 ET 50
i You can obtain information about tires and tire dimensions that are not listed here at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
All-weather tiresTires Alloy wheels
295/40 R21 111W XL M+S6 10J x 21 ET45
i You can obtain information about tires and tire dimensions that are not listed here at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Winter tiresTires Alloy wheels
265/55 R19 109H M+S 9.5J x 19 H2 ET 50
i You can obtain information about tires and tire dimensions that are not listed here at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Spare wheel! The spare wheel must be inflated to the maximum tire pressure given in the table on the insideof the fuel filler flap.
i The spare wheel corresponds to the standard tires.
5 Vehicles with AMG Sports package only.6 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.
286 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires
i You can obtain information about tires and tire dimensions that are not listed here at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Wheel and tire combinations 287
Wheelsandtires
Z
Useful information
i ThisOperator'sManual describes allmodelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of publica-tion of the Operator's Manual. Country-spe-cific differences are possible. Please notethat your vehicle may not be equipped with allfeatures described. This also applies tosafety-related systems and functions.
i Read the information on qualified specialistworkshops: (Y page 23).
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-cle identification number (VIN) andpaint code number
X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code
i The data shown on the vehicle identificationplate is used only as an example. This data isdifferent for every vehicle and can deviatefrom the data shown here. The correct datafor your vehicle can be found on the vehicleidentification plate that is mounted on yourvehicle.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
: VIN (stamped into the chassis on the right-hand side, when viewed in the direction oftravel)
288 Identification platesTechnicaldata
: VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)The VIN can be found in the following locations:Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 288)Rstamped into the chassis on the right-handside (when viewed in the direction of travel)Ron the lower edge of the windshield
Engine number
Example: G 550: Emissions control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and Cali-fornian emissions standards
; Engine number (stamped into the crank-case)
Service products and filling capaci-ties
Important safety notes
G WARNINGService products may be poisonous and haz-ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.
H Environmental noteDispose of service products in an environ-mentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. Only use products recommended byMercedes-Benz. Damagewhich is caused by theuse of products which have not been recom-mended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benzwarranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed inthis Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in theappropriate section.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approved byMercedes-Benz by the following inscription onthe containers:RMB-Freigabe (e. g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e. g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendations indi-cate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g. MB229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Other identifications, for example:R0 W-30R5 W-30R5 W-40
Service products and filling capacities 289
Technicaldata
Z
Fuel
Important safety notes
G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-sion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.
G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistance with-out delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-ing.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacityThe total capacity of the fuel tank may varydepending on the equipment in the vehicle.
Model Total capa-city
All models 25.4 US gal(96.0 l)
Model Of whichreserve
All models Approx.3.7 US gal(14.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignitionif you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.Even small amounts of the wrong fuel couldresult in damage to the fuel system and theengine. Notify a qualified specialist workshopand have the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.
! Only refuel using unleaded premium gradegasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
! Only use the fuel recommended. Operatingthe vehicle with other fuels can lead to enginefailure.
! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-mended for your vehicle. Do not use addi-tives. Otherwise, engine damage may occur.This does not include cleaning additives forthe removal and prevention of residue build-up. Gasoline may only be mixed with cleaningadditives recommended by Mercedes-Benz;see "Additives". You can obtain further infor-mation from any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.
! To ensure the longevity and full perform-ance of the engine, only premium-gradeunleaded gasoline must be used.
290 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailableand you have to refuel with unleaded gasolineof a lower grade, observe the following pre-cautions:ROnly fill the fuel tank to half full with regularunleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon aspossible.RDo not drive at the maximum speed.RAvoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find the labelon the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
i For further information, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop or visithttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You canrefuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
As a temporary measure, if the recommendedfuel is not available, you may also use regularunleaded gasoline with an octane rating of87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoiddriving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI.Information on refueling (Y page 127).
AMG vehicles! Only refuel using super-grade unleaded gas-oline with at least 98 RON/88 MON that con-forms to European standard EN 228 or anequivalent specification.You could otherwise impair engine output ordamage the engine.
! Premium-grade unleaded gasoline with anoctane rating of 95 RON/85 MON may beused as a temporary measure if the recom-mended fuel is not available. This may reduceengine performance and increase fuel con-sumption. Do not drive at full throttle.
! Regular unleaded gasoline with an octanerating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also beused as an emergency measure if the recom-mended fuel is not available.Doing so results in noticeably higher fuel con-sumption, and the engine power output isnoticeably reduced. Avoid driving at full throt-tle.
If only regular unleaded gasoline with anoctane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON or loweris available, you must have the vehicle adap-ted to this fuel at a qualified specialist work-shop.
Additives! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Do notmix fuel additives with fuel. This does notinclude additives for the removal and preven-tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only bemixed with additives recommended byMercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructionsfor use on the product label.More informationabout recommended additives can beobtained from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use bran-ded fuels that have additives.The quality of the fuel available in some coun-tries may not be sufficient. Residue could buildup in the fuel injection system as a result. Insuch cases, and in consultation with an author-ized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline maybe mixed with the cleaning additive recommen-ded by Mercedes-Benz. You must observe thenotes and mixing ratios specified on the con-tainer.
Fuel consumption information
H Environmental noteCO2 (carbon dioxide) is the gas which scien-tists believe to be principally responsible forglobal warming (the greenhouse effect). Yourvehicle's CO2 emissions are directly related tofuel consumption and therefore depend on:Refficient use of the fuel by the engineRdriving styleRother non-technical factors, such as envi-ronmental influences, road conditions ortraffic flow
You can minimize your vehicle's CO2 emis-sions by driving carefully and having it serv-iced regularly.
Service products and filling capacities 291
Technicaldata
Z
The vehicle will use more fuel than usual in thefollowing situations:Rat very low outside temperaturesRin city trafficRon short journeysRin mountainous terrainRwhen towing a trailer
Engine oil
General notes
! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-ification other than is necessary to fulfill theprescribed service intervals. Do not changethe engine oil or oil filter in order to achievelonger replacement intervals than those pre-scribed. You could otherwise cause enginedamage or damage to the exhaust gas after-treatment.Follow the instructions in the service intervaldisplay regarding the oil change. Otherwise,you may damage the engine and the exhaustgas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the importantsafety notes on service products (Y page 289).The engine oils are matched to the performanceofMercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.For this reason, only use engine oils and oil fil-ters that are approved for vehicles with a servicesystem.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center orgo to the Internet sitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com (USA only).The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.
Model MB-Freigabe or MBApproval
G 550 229.3 / 229.5
G 63 AMG 229.5
i The MB-Freigabe or MB Approval is statedon the oil containers.
Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.
Vehicle model Capacity includingoil filter
G 550 2.4 US gal (9.0 l)
G 63 AMG 2.25 US gal (8.5 l)
Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.
Engine oil viscosity
Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of afluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, thismeans that it is thick; a low viscosity means thatit is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you which SAEclassifications are to be used. The low-temper-ature characteristics of engine oils can deterio-rate significantly, e.g. as a result of aging, sootand fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly rec-ommended that you carry out regular oilchanges using an approved engine oil with theappropriate SAE classification.
292 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle is fil-led with refrigerant R‑134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.
! Only the refrigerant R‑134a and the PAG oilapproved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.The approved PAG oil may not be mixed withany other PAG oil that is not approved forR-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climatecontrol system may be damaged.
Service work, such as topping up refrigerant orreplacing components, may only be carried outby a qualified specialist workshop. All applicableregulations must be adhered to, SAE standardJ639 included.Always have work on the climate control systemcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Refrigerant instruction label
Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerantWarning symbol: advises you about:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop
Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.
AMG vehicles Capacity
Refrigerant
PAG oil
All other models Capacity
Refrigerant
PAG oil
Brake fluid
G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-tant safety notes on service products(Y page 289).The brake fluid change intervals can be found inthe Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB Approval331.0.Information about approved brake fluid can beobtained at any qualified specialist workshop oron the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Service products and filling capacities 293
Technicaldata
Z
Coolant
Important safety notes
G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-ponents in the engine compartment, it mayignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you add anti-freeze.Make sure that antifreeze is not spillednext to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean theantifreeze from components before startingthe engine.
! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can be foundin the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, evenin countries where high temperatures prevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.
i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and the replace-ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 289).The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-lowing tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection down to-35 ‡ (-37†), the boiling point of the coolant inthe pressurized system is approximately 266 ‡(130 †).
The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentra-tion in the engine cooling system should:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection downto -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not bedissipated as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor in accordance with MB Spec-ifications for Service Products 310.1.
i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filledwith a coolant mixture that ensures adequateantifreeze and corrosion protection.
i The coolant is checked with every mainte-nance interval at a qualified specialist work-shop.
The engine cooling system is filled with coolantat the factory which contains antifreeze/corro-sion inhibitor that ensures protection down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Your vehicle has a range of aluminum compo-nents. Aluminum components in the enginemake it necessary to use antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor that has been specifically formulated toprotect the aluminum parts. Failure to use suchanticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in asignificantly shortened service life.The coolantmust be used throughout the year inorder to maintain the necessary corrosion pro-tection and to provide protection from over-heating. In the Maintenance Booklet, you canfind information on the intervals for renewal.The renewal interval is determined by the cool-ant type and the engine cooling system design.The renewal interval in theMaintenance Bookletis only valid if the coolant is renewed or added towith Mercedes-Benz approved products. There-fore, only use MB 326.0 antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor or another Mercedes-Benz approvedproduct of the same specification.Information on other products with the samespecifications that are approved by Mercedes-Benz can be obtained at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.If the coolant level is too low, MB 325.0 anti-freeze/corrosion inhibitor should be added.Have the engine cooling system checked forpossible leaks.
294 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata
Capacity
Model Capacity
G 550 Approx. 11.1 US qt(10.5 l)
G 63 AMG Approx. 14.6 US qt(13.8 l)Low-temperature cir-cuit: approximately3.1 US qt (2.9 l)
i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor.
Windshield/headlamp cleaning sys-tem
Important safety notes
G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate could ignite ifit comes into contact with hot engine compo-nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk offire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washer con-centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.
! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.
At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit.
X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixture ofwater and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MB Sum-merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid allyear round.
Vehicle data
General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicle data:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result of:
- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRthe vehicle length specified includes the frontlicense plate adapter.
Dimensions and weights
G 550 G 63 AMG
: Upper-edgeclearance
75 in -78.9 in
(1905 mm -2005 mm)
74.5 in -78.4 in
(1892 mm -1992 mm)
; Lower-edgeclearance
26.8 in -30.7 in
(680 mm -780 mm)
26.3 in -30.2 in
(667 mm -767 mm)
= Range ofmovement
36.7 in(931 mm)
36.7 in(931 mm)
Vehicle data 295
Technicaldata
Z
G 550
Vehicle length 187.6 in(4764 mm)
Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors
80.9 in(2056 mm)
Vehicle height 76.9 in(1954 mm)
Vehicle height (sports sus-pension)
75.9 in(1928 mm)
Wheelbase 112.2 in(2850 mm)
Minimum ground clear-ance
7.6 in(193 mm)
Turning radius 44.6 ft(13.60 m)
Gross vehicle weight rat-ing (GVWR)
7054.8 lb(3200 kg)
Gross axle weight rating(GAWR), front
3196.7 lb(1450 kg)
Gross axle weight rating(GAWR), rear
4188.8 lb(1900 kg)
G 63 AMG
Vehicle length 187.8 in(4769 mm)
Vehicle width includingexterior mirrors
80.9 in(2056 mm)
Vehicle height 76.3 in(1938 mm)
Wheelbase 112.2 in(2850 mm)
Minimum ground clear-ance
7.7 in(196 mm)
Turning radius 44.6 ft(13.60 m)
Gross vehicle weight rat-ing (GVWR)
7054.8 lb(3200 kg)
Gross axle weight rating(GAWR), front
3417.1 lb(1550 kg)
Gross axle weight rating(GAWR), rear
4122.6 lb(1870 kg)
i GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of the vehicle. Gross vehicle weight(GVW) is the vehicle weight including fuel,service products, spare wheel, accessoriesinstalled, load and, if applicable, trailer draw-bar load. The GVW must never exceed theGVWR.
i The GAWR is the maximum permissible axleweight.
Vehicle data for off-road driving
Fording depth! The depth of water must not exceed thevalue specified in the table. Note that thepossible fording depth is less in flowingwater.
The table shows fording depth: when loadedand ready to drive.
Fording depth 24 in (60 cm)
Formore information about off-road fording, see(Y page 135).
Approach/departure angle
G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is arisk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.
296 Vehicle data for off-road drivingTechnicaldata
For vehicleswith steel springs, loaded and readyto drive means: a full tank, all fluids refilled andthe driver is in the vehicle.
: ;
G 550 30° 30°
G 63 AMG 27° 27°
For further information about approach/depar-ture angles, see (Y page 140).
Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-ityNote that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-bility depends on the off-road conditions and theroad surface conditions.On good road surfaces the maximum gradient-climbing capability of your vehicle is 100%,which corresponds to an approach/departureangle of 45°.Accelerate carefully and make sure that thewheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-rain.
i If the load on the front axle is reduced whenpulling away on a steep uphill slope, the frontwheels have a tendency to spin. 4ETS detectsthis and brakes the wheels accordingly. Therear wheel torque is increased, making it eas-ier to drive off.
For further information about the maximum gra-dient climbing ability, see (Y page 140).
Trailer tow hitch
Mounting dimensions! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,changes to the engine cooling systemmay benecessary, depending on the vehicle type.If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,observe the anchorage points on the chassisframe.
: Anchorage points; Overhang dimensionFor trailer tow hitches installed at the factory,the overhang dimension including protectivecovering is 35.2 in (895 mm).
Trailer tow hitch 297
Technicaldata
Z
Trailer loads
G 550G 63 AMG
Permissible trailer load, unbraked 1653 lbs (750 kg)
Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)
7716 lbs (3500 kg)
Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer (the draw-bar noseweight is not included in the towing weight)
4189 lbs (1900 kg)
Trailer drawbar noseweight
Number of people150 lbs (68 kg) each
Seat occupancy Trunk load Maximum drawbarnoseweight
2 Front seats 220 lbs (100 kg) 562 lbs (255 kg)
3 2 front seats1 rear seat
176 lbs (80 kg) 562 lbs (255 kg)
4 2 front seats2 Rear seats
132 lbs (60 kg) 456 lbs (207 kg)
5 2 front seats3 rear seats
0 lbs (0 kg) 423 lbs (192 kg)
The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be found onthe trailer tow hitch or trailer identification plates. The lowest weight applies.The maximum permissible trailer drawbar noseweight is the maximumweight with which the trailerdrawbar can be loaded. Limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings.
Ball position
Ball position of the ball couplingWhen choosing a ball coupling, the dimensionsstated in the illustration must not be exceeded.
298 Trailer tow hitchTechnicaldata
299
300
